advertisement
Monarch®
Printers
¨ 9825®
¨ 9855®
¨ 9860ä
TC9800PM Rev. DK 3/09 ©1996 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved.
Each product and program carries a respective written warranty, the only warranty on which the customer can rely. Avery Dennison Corp. reserves the right to make changes in the product, the programs, and their availability at any time and without notice. Although Avery Dennison Corp. has made every effort to provide complete and accurate information in this manual, Avery Dennison
Corp. shall not be liable for any omissions or inaccuracies. Any update will be incorporated in a later edition of this manual.
©1996 Avery Dennison Corp. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means, without the prior written permission of
Avery Dennison Corp.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CANADIAN D.O.C. WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Le pr ésent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le
Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicte par le minist ère des
Communications du Canada.
Trademarks
Monarch®, 9800®, 9825®, and 9855® are registered trademarks of Avery Dennison Retail Information
Services LLC.
MONARCH LANGUAGE INTERPRETER, MLI, MonarchNet2, 7410, 926, 928, 932, 935, 939, 939i, and 9860 are trademarks of Avery Dennison Retail Information Services LLC.
Avery Dennison® is a trademark of Avery Dennison Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, and NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Novell and NetWare are trademarks of
Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. HP Jet Admin and HP Web Jet Admin are trademarks of
Hewlett-Packard, Inc. Hewlett-Packard is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard, Inc.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. EPCglobal, Inc.ä and Electronic Product Codeä (EPC) are trademarks of Uniform Code Council, Inc. UFST, Monotype, the Monotype logo, and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Avery Dennison Printer Systems Division
170 Monarch Lane
Miamisburg, OH 45342
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
Filling in the Format Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Setting Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
MPCLII Punctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Standard Syntax Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Using Online Configuration Packets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Configuration Packet Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Configuration Syntax Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Defining the System Setup Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Defining the Supply Setup Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Defining the Print Control Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
i
Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Defining the Control Characters Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Resetting Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Using Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Enabling Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Sending Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Defining the Communication Settings Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Special Considerations When Using Backfeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Defining the Memory Configuration Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Checking Current Buffer Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
About Memory Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Buffer Worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Buffer Allocation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Memory Considerations with Downloaded TrueType Fonts . . . . . 2-31
Clearing Packets from Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Using the Font Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Uploading Format Header Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Defining the RFID Setup Packet for UHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Defining the RFID Setup Packet for HF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
ii
Defining Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Combining Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Sample Upload Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Option 20 (Define Data Entry Prompts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Option 21 (Define Extended Field Names) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sample Use for Padding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Option 51 (PDF417 Security/Truncation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Option 60 (Incrementing/Decrementing Fields). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Fixing the First Number in the Incrementing Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Option 64 (Program AFI Field for UHF RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
iii
Using Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Sum of Products Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Sum of Digits Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Determining a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Using the Hex Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Run Length Encoding Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Using Volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Positioning the Graphic Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Sample Compliance Graphic Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Sample Run Length Graphic Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
iv
Using Expanded EPC Gen2 RFID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Merged or Sub-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Incrementing Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
9855 RFID Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Serial Bar Code Printing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Sequential Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Batch Quantity Zero Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Optional Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Creating DOS Batch Files for Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Inquiry Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 1 Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 2 Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Status Polling Considerations for Script Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
v
If You Receive an Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
If the PC and Printer Are Not Communicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Online Configuration Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Check Digit Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Communication Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Mode 0 (Obsolete) Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Mode 2 Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Mode 3 Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
MaxiCode Compression Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
vi
Sample Data Matrix Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Square Data Matrix Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Rectangular Data Matrix Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Sample Data Matrix with Function 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Entering Batch Data for QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
QR Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Structured Append Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Structured Append QR Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Sample GS1 DataBar Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Sample GS1 DataBar with Function 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Sample Aztec Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Sample Data Entry Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Expanded C1Gen2 Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
PaxarSymbols Font 56 Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Paxar Font 70 and Font 71 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
NAFTA Font 72 and Font 73 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Using 300 DPI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold (9 pt.) 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
CG Triumvirate™ Type face Bold (9 pt.) 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (6 pt.) 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (6 pt.) 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (7 pt.) 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (7 pt.) 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (9 pt.) 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
vii
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (9 pt.) 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (11 pt.) 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (11 pt.) 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (15 pt.) 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
CG Triumvirateä Typeface (15 pt.) 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Selecting a Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
International Font Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Arabic Font Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Locating the Font Number in a Font Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
Supported Symbol Sets and Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Selecting a Symbol Set or Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Using International Character Sets/Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Internal Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
ANSI Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Bold Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
OCRA Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Code Page 100 (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Code Page 101 (Wingdings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Code Page 850 (Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Code Page 852 (Latin 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Code Page 855 (Russian) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
viii
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Code Page 1253 (Greek) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Code Page 1254 (Turkish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Code Page 1256 (Arabic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Code Page 1257 (Baltic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
ON (Black) Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
OFF (White Dots). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
ix
x
G E T T I N G S T A R T E D
Before you read this manual, review the printer information in the
Operator’s Handbook. This manual provides the necessary information to design, write and print a Monarch® Printer Control
Language II (MPCLII) format. The following printers support this type of format:
¨ 9825® (V. 1.0 or greater)
¨ 9855® (V. 1.0 or greater)
¨ 9860™ (V. 1.0 or greater)
See Appendix E, “Printer Differences” for a description of each printer’s features.
A b o u t T h i s M a n u a l
You do not need to be a programmer to use this manual, but you must be familiar with creating text files and using basic MS-DOS® commands. This chapter describes how to
¨ create and download a sample MPCLII packet.
¨ use the Supply Layout Grid and Format Worksheet.
¨ categorize data into field types and select fonts to use in your format.
See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for a list of available fonts for your printer. See Chapter 4, “Defining Field Options,” for a list of available options for your printer.
1
Printer Differences 1-1
B e f o r e Yo u B e g i n
1.
Connect the printer to the host. Refer to the Quick Reference for more information.
2.
Load supplies in the printer. Refer to the Quick Reference for more information.
3.
Turn on the printer.
4.
Set the communication parameters and configure the printer. The communication parameters at the printer must match those at the host.
See Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer,” for more information.
5.
Design your format. See “Starting with a Design” for more information.
6.
Download your format to the printer. See Chapter 6, “Printing,” for more information.
C r e a t i n g a n M P C L I I F o r m a t P a c k e t
A format defines which fields appear and where the fields are printed on the label. The printer requires this information in a special form, using
Monarch® Printer Control Language II (MPCL). This section describes how to create a sample MPCLII format packet.
Make sure supplies are loaded, the printer is connected to the host and is ready to receive data. Refer to the Quick Reference for more information.
For detailed information about the format header, text, constant text, and bar code fields, see Chapter 3, "Defining Fields." For information about batch packets, see Chapter 6, “Printing.”
1.
Type the following format header in any text editor:
{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"FMT-25" p
2.
Type the following constant text field:
C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT",0 p
3.
Type the following bar code field:
B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 p
1-2 Getting Started
4.
Type the following text field:
T,2,18,V,50,50,1,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,1 p }
You have created a format packet for your MPCLII printer. Now, a batch packet must be created before you can print the format.
5.
Type the following batch header, after the text field line:
{B,25,N,1 p
6.
Type the following bar code data:
1,"02802811111" p
7.
Type the following text field data:
2,"TEXT FIELD" p }
8.
Save your file as SAMPLE.FMT.
9.
Type MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1 at the DOS prompt if you are using serial communications. This sets the communication parameters at your host.
These communication parameters must match those at your printer.
See “Setting Communication Parameters,” in Chapter 2, or your host’s documentation for more information.
Printer Differences 1-3
10. Type COPY SAMPLE.FMT COM1. The following 2 inch by 2 inch label prints:
{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"Fmt 25" p
C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT",0 p
B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 p
T,2,18,V,50,50,1,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,25,N,1 p
1,"02802811111" p
2,"TEXT FIELD" p }
See “Starting with a Design” to design your format and Chapter 3, "Defining Fields" to create text, bar code, and line fields.
D a i l y S t a r t u p P r o c e d u r e s
You may want to design a checklist for operators to follow each day. Here are a few suggested items: Turn on the printer and host, make sure ribbon and supplies are loaded, make sure communication parameters are set, and download packets from the host to the printer.
You may want to keep records of supplies that have been printed. A good way to do this is to design a print log for operators to complete at the end of the day. Here are some suggestions for types of information to include in a print log: date, operator’s name, format name, supply size, quantity printed, evaluation of print quality, and problems/comments.
Keep backup copies of your format, batch data, check digit, and graphic packets.
1-4 Getting Started
S t a r t i n g w i t h a D e s i g n
Before you create a format packet, you must design your label. There are several steps to designing a custom label:
1.
Decide which fields should appear on your label. See “Determining
Format Contents” for more information.
2.
Determine your label size. Labels are available from us in a wide variety of sizes. Your application and the amount of data you need to print determines the supply size. Contact your Account Manager or
Technical Support for more information.
3.
Draw a rough sketch of your label. You may want to draw several variations to see what works best. See “Drawing Rough Sketches” for more information.
4.
Identify the field types that appear on your label. See “Considering
Field Types” for more information.
5.
Decide which fonts you want to use. See “Considering Fonts” for more information.
6.
Fill out your Format Worksheet. See “Using the Format Worksheet” for more information.
At this point, you are ready to send your design to the printer. To do this:
7.
Create a format packet, based on how you filled out your worksheet.
See Chapter 3, “Defining Fields,” for more information.
8.
Download your format packet to the printer. See Chapter 6, “Printing,” for more information.
Printer Differences 1-5
D e t e r m i n i n g F o r m a t C o n t e n t s
Before you lay out your format, answer these questions. How large is your supply, which fonts do you want to use, do you want to include a bar code, and do you want to include graphics?
D e t e r m i n i n g t h e P r i n t A r e a
The “bottom” (or leading edge) is the edge that exits the printer first. The
0,0 point is at the bottom left corner of the label. The print area is in the center of the label.
Printer
9825
9855/
9860
9855RFMP
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
Dots
English
Metric
Dots (203)
Dots (300)
English
Metric
Dots (203)
Dots (300)
Max. Supply
(Wid x Len)
425 x 1750
1080 x 4445
863 x 3553
425 x 1750
1080 x 4445
863 x 3553
1275 x 5250
400 x 1300
1016 x 3300
812 x 2639
1200 x 3900
Max. Print Area
(WidxLen)
400 x 1600
1016 x 4064
812 x 3248
400 x 1600
1016 x 4064
812 x 3248
1200 x 3900
400 x 1600
1016 x 4064
812 x 3248
1200 x 3900
Min. Supply
(Wid x Len)
75 x 50
191 x 127
152 x 102
75 x 32
191 x 81
152 x 65
225 x 96
400 x 100
1016 x 254
812 x 203
1200 x 300
Min. Print Area
(Wid x Len)
75 x 50
191 x 127
152 x 102
75 x 32
191 x 81
152 x 65
225 x 96
400 x 100
1016 x 254
812 x 203
1200 x 300
Note: You can create longer images if you reallocate memory to increase your image buffer. See "Defining the Memory Packet" in Chapter 2 for more information.
The following non-print zones are recommended for the printers:
All Supplies
All Supplies
.050 inches on either edge of the label.
.020 inches at the end of the label.
1-6 Getting Started
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum no-scan zone on the trailing edge of the label of 0.5 inch (13 mm). The trailing edge is the edge of the label that exits the printer last; regardless of how the format is designed on the label.
Use the following formulas to convert inches to dots and metric:
Dots = inches x 203 (or 300 dots per inch)
Metric (1/10mm) = inches x 254
English (1/100 inch) = 100 x (dots/203) or (dots/300)
Dots = Metric (1/10 mm) x 799/1000 (or 1181/1000)
300 dpi depends on your printer.
D r a w i n g R o u g h S k e t c h e s
After you decide what information you want to print, sketch how you want the information to appear on the label. Note any areas that are preprinted on the label, such as a logo.
As soon as you know what information to include on the label, and you have a rough sketch, you can use a supply layout grid to help you layout and size your label. If you do not want to use a grid, go to “Considering Field Types” to choose what information you want on your label.
Printer Differences 1-7
U s i n g S u p p l y L a y o u t G r i d s
A supply layout grid contains measurement markers. These markers help you accurately position information on your label.
Decide whether you want to design formats using English, Metric, or Dot measurements. Choose from the following grids:
¨ English
The English grid is measured in 1/100 inches.
¨ Metric
The Metric grid is measured in 1/10 millimeters (mm).
¨ Graphic
The printer uses dots to print images on a label.
The printhead has 203 dots per inch (dpi) or an optional 300 dots per inch printhead depending on your printer.
Choose English or Metric units when designing formats to use with different printers. English or Metric units allow more direct use of formats on printers with different density printheads.
If you want to use the supply layout grids, a copy of each is in Appendix
D, “Format Design Tools.”
1-8 Getting Started
C o n s i d e r i n g F i e l d Ty p e s
After you select a supply size, the next step in designing a format is to decide what information you want to print on the label. For example, you may want to print your company name, price of an item, and a bar code that combines information from other places. Everything you want to print falls into one of the following categories.
Field Type
Text
Non-Printable
Text
Description
Contains letters, numbers, or symbols you want to print.
Holds data for use later, such as for merging into another field. The printer does not print non-printable text fields.
Used for printing bar codes that can be scanned.
Examples item number, item description, department number, price, date city, state, and zip code to be included in a bar code
Bar Code item or serial numbers, zip codes, information you don’t want to have visible to customers company name, company address Constant Text Prints fixed characters that print without changing.
Line or Box Highlights or separates items.
Graphic
Verifier
RFID
Contains a bitmap image or a compliance label overlay.
Specifies a verifier configuration to use for each format.
Contains the RFID data you need to program into the RFID tag.
line marking out the regular price, border around the supply logos mode 2, mode 19
Class 1 Gen1, Class 1 Gen2, EPC data
All of the above field types except graphics are discussed in Chapter 3.
See Chapter 5, “Creating Graphics” for information on including graphics in your format.
Printer Differences 1-9
C o n s i d e r i n g F o n t s
When working with fonts, you have three considerations: font appearance, font size (scalable or bitmapped), and font spacing (monospaced or proportional).
The TrueType® scalable font, EFF Swiss Boldä (font 50) is standard on the printers. See Appendix B, “Fonts,” for samples of each font.
I n t e r c h a n g i n g P a c k e t s
You can use an MPCLII format that was designed for another MPCLII printer on a 9800 series printer. However, the format may appear smaller (fields will be shorter), because most of the 9800 series printers use a 203 dpi printhead. The 9855 and 9860 printers have an optional 300 dpi printhead.
U s i n g t h e F o r m a t W o r k s h e e t
The Format Worksheet is divided into sections that list the field types. Each section has boxes to fill in with parameters that define your format. A format worksheet is included in Appendix D, “Format Design Tools.”
F i l l i n g i n t h e F o r m a t W o r k s h e e t
Decide what type of field to use on your label.
1.
Make a copy of the Format Worksheet.
2.
Define the Format Header.
3.
Define all non-printable text fields before you define the ones you want to print. See “Defining Non-Printable Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
4.
Define options as you require them. See Chapter 4, “Defining Field
Options” for more information.
1-10 Getting Started
C O N F I G U R I N G T H E P R I N T E R
This chapter discusses how to
¨
¨
¨
¨ set communication parameters.
upload the printer’s configuration or font information.
configure the printer using online configuration packets.
use immediate commands to control the printer’s operation at any time.
Some parameters may not be available on each printer. See
Appendix E, “Printer Differences,” for a list of differences between all the printers.
2
Configuring the Printer 2-1
S e t t i n g C o m m u n i c a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s
Use the following information if you are using serial communications. See
“Using Parallel Communications” for information about parallel communications.
The communication parameters at the printer must match those at the host, or you will not be able to communicate.
You can use the communication settings packet to set communication parameters for your printer.
On MS-DOS computers, you can use the MODE command to set communication values on your PC.
For example
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1
This command sets your host to these communication values: 9600 baud, no parity, an 8 bit word length, 1 stop bit.
U s i n g P a r a l l e l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s
If your printer supports parallel communications, the parallel port is
IEEE-1284 or Centronics® mode. You can set which mode to use through the control panel. Refer to the Quick Reference for control panel information. The communication settings are automatically configured for you. There are no operator settings required.
We recommend waiting at least two seconds (or longer) when switching between the serial and parallel ports to send data, because data may be lost. Be careful when using print spoolers, because data transmission occurs in the background of the operating system. This makes data transmission completion difficult to determine when switching between ports.
2-2 Configuring the Printer
U s i n g M P C L I I C o n v e n t i o n s
Here are some guidelines to follow when using MPCLII.
M P C L I I P u n c t u a t i o n
Use the following symbols when creating MPCLII packets:
Character Decimal
Value
Description
{ (left bracket)
} (right bracket) p (vertical bar)
, (comma)
“ABC”
(quotation marks)
'comment'
(single quotation marks)
123
125
124
044
034
039 start of header end of header field separator* parameter separator
Quotation marks enclose character strings. Empty quotes (“”) identify null strings or unused fields.
Grave accents enclose comments. Any data enclosed in grave accents is ignored. Do not embed comments within a quoted string. Grave accents are also used to reject mainframe data.
* The field separator is the split vertical bar, which we are representing as p in this manual. The decimal value is 124. To enter this character, use the Shift key plus the Split Vertical Bar key on your computer’s keyboard. Depending on your text editor, it may appear as a solid vertical bar or as a split vertical bar.
Note: These MPCL characters are the default.
S t a n d a r d S y n t a x G u i d e l i n e s
When creating MPCLII packets:
¨ Begin each packet with a start of header ({).
¨ End each packet with an end of header (}).
¨ Define no more than 1000 fields in a format. Each p indicates one field.
However, options are not counted as fields. The actual number of fields a format can have may be less, because the number of fields is limited by the available memory.
¨ The field number (0 to 999) must be unique. We recommend starting at
1, instead of 0.
Configuring the Printer 2-3
¨ Do not use a field number more than once per format.
¨ Define all fields in the order you want to image/print them. The printer does not print in field number order.
¨ Separate all parameters with a Parameter Separator (,).
¨ End each field with a Field Separator ( p ).
¨ Enter all information in CAPITAL letters, except words or phrases within quotation marks.
¨ Include all parameters for a field unless documented as optional.
¨ Define non-printable text fields before the field to which they apply.
¨ Define options immediately after the field to which they apply.
¨ Multiple options can be used with most fields. Options can be used in any combination except as noted with each definition. Options are processed in the order they are received.
¨ Keep in mind that proportionally spaced fonts need wider fields than monospaced fonts. For variable field data, use a letter “W” to determine the maximum field size.
¨ Do not place a new line (return) or any other non-printing character within a field definition. However, a carriage return or line break after each p makes your formats easier to read.
T,1,20,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
T,2,10,V,50,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
¨ Spaces are ignored, except within character strings.
¨ Indenting options improves readability of your formats.
T,1,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,42,1 p
¨ Use a tilde (~) followed by a 3-digit ASCII code in a quoted string to send function codes or extended characters or send the 8-bit ASCII code.
You can modify formats and fields with the optional entry method. See
“Optional Entry Method” in Chapter 6 for more information.
2-4 Configuring the Printer
U s i n g O n l i n e C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a c k e t s
Use online configuration packets to change the printer’s settings. You can send an individual configuration packet or a single packet containing all the configuration packets. Supply all parameters for each packet. Leave the parameters blank that you do not need to change. For example,
{ I ,A,,,,1 p prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online System Setup parameters.
Make a copy of the online configuration worksheet in Appendix D, “Format
Design Tools,” and save the original. Packets A-M are listed on the worksheet.
When you turn off the printer, all the information in the online configuration packets is saved and used when the printer is turned back on. After you change printer configurations, you must resend the format, batch, or graphic to the printer before the changes take effect.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a c k e t H e a d e r
Always include an I , im me di ately af ter the left bracket { and be fore the packet iden ti fier (A, B, C, etc.). The I pa ram e ter iden ti fies the data stream as a con fig u ra tion packet.
Note: Include the I pa ram e ter with each packet if you are send ing them in di vid u ally. In clude it only at the be gin ning of a data stream if you are send ing mul ti ple pack ets.
Configuring the Printer 2-5
This is the syntax to use when you create online configuration packets:
Syntax
{
I,
A, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p
B, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p
C, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p
D, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 3 p
E, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 9 p
F, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5 p
G, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 4 p
M, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 4 p
}
Syntax for single packet
Start of Header
Con fig u ra tion Header
Sys tem Setup
Sup ply Setup
Print Con trol
Mon e tary For mat ting
Con trol Char ac ters
Com mu ni ca tion Set tings
Backfeed Con trol
Mem ory Con fig u ra tion
End of Header
{
I,
A, pa ram e ter 1...pa ram e ter 5
}
4. device
Start of Header
Con fig u ra tion Header
Sys tem Setup
End of Header
You can also add a configuration to RAM or specify units for supply, print, margin, and cut positions. If you use the optional parameters with the I packet, any online configuration packets following the split vertical bar ( p ) must specify distances using the selected units. However, the test labels display the units in dots, even if you entered them in English or Metrics units.
Syntax
{header,ID#,action,device p }
1. header
2. ID#
3. action
Constant I.
ID. Use 0.
Action. Options:
A Add configuration.
U Upload User Configuration.
Storage Device. Use R (Volatile RAM).
2-6 Configuring the Printer
5. units
Example
Units. (Optional parameter.) Options:
E English
M Metric
G Dots
{ I,0,A,R,E p
C,0,25,0,0,0 p }
Adds a configuration to volatile RAM and specifies English units. It also uses the default contrast, moves print 0.25 inches closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the default printhead width.
If you do not use the optional parameters, the syntax for the online configuration packets does not change. For example,
{ I,C,0,50,0,0,0 p } uses the default contrast, moves print 50 dots (0.25) inches closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the default printhead width.
Example { I,0,U,R p }
Uploads the printer configuration from volatile RAM and returns the following to the host.
A,0,0,0,1,0 p
B,1,1,0,0,0 p
C,0,0,0,0,0,0 p
D,1,0,2 p
E,"~123~044~034~124~125~126","","~013~010" p
F,3,1,0,0,1 p
G,0,65,65 p
M,R,76365,45190,N,0,0 p
M,R,R,640 p
M,T,R,640 p
M,I,R,3300 p
M,V,R,3840 p
Configuring the Printer 2-7
The parameters for each packet (A-M) are displayed. In the first line that begins with M, 76365 is the total volatile memory available, 45190 is the memory available in volatile RAM. There is no non-volatile RAM available.
The remaining lines beginning with M list the buffer sizes in 1/10K for the
Receive, Transmit, Image, Downloadable Fonts, Formats, and Scalable
Fonts Buffers.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n S y n t a x G u i d e l i n e s
When creating a printer configuration packet:
¨ Follow the “Standard Syntax Guidelines” listed at the beginning of this manual.
¨ The first character after the start of header ({) is the configuration
header ( I ).
¨ Download multiple configuration packets within one packet or download a single configuration packet.
¨ If you change any of the online configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer, so the configuration changes take effect.
¨ Include the first five ANSI codes, at a minimum, in the control characters packet.
¨ Send configuration packets once per session (each time the printer is turned off and then back on), not with every format or batch packet.
M a k i n g P r i n t A d j u s t m e n t s
You can adjust where the printer prints on your supply by adjusting the supply, print, or margin positions. However, keep in mind the following:
¨ Supply adjustments across the width of your supply, such as the margin position, are based in dots- either 203 dpi or 300 dpi, depending on your printhead density.
¨ Supply adjustments for the length of your supply, such as supply position or print adjustment, are always measured in 1/203 of an inch, regardless of your printhead density.
2-8 Configuring the Printer
D e f i n i n g t h e S y s t e m S e t u p P a c k e t
Use the system setup packet (A) to select the power up mode, display language, print separators between batches, print a “slashed zero,” and select the symbol set.
Syntax { I,A,powup_mode,lan guage,sep_on,slash_zero, sym bol_set p}
A1. A System Setup Packet
A2. powup_mode Online Mode. Options:
0 online mode (default)
1 offline mode (9855/9860).
A3. language
A4. sep_on
Display Language. Options
0 English (default)
1
2
French
German
5
6
3
4
Spanish - ES
Japanese
Portuguese
Italian
7
8
9
10
11
12
Swedish
Spanish2 - MX
Danish
Dutch
Finnish
Norwegian
Batch Separators. Options:
0
1
Does not print a separator (default)
Prints a separator
2 Double-length separator- prints 2 tags (9855/9860)
Note: Do not use batch separators with continuous (non-indexed) supply or RFID supply. If using a stacker, the batch separator is 3.66
inches long.
A5. slash_zero Slash Zero. Options:
0 Print a standard zero (default)
1 Print a zero with a slash through it
Configuring the Printer 2-9
A6. symbol_set Symbol Set. Options:
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Internal (default)
ANSI
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.)
Code Page 850 (Latin 1)
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
Code Page 1251 (Cy ril lic)
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
Code Page 1253 (Greek)
Code Page 1254 (Turk ish)
Code Page 1255 (He brew)
Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
Code Page 1257 (Bal tic)
Code Page 1258 (Viet nam ese)
DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
DOS Code Page 855 (Rus sian)
DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turk ish)
DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Por tu guese)
Wingdings
Macintosh
Unicode
BIG5
GB2312
SJIS (Shift JIS) to SJIS (Code Page 932, Jap a nese)
GB2312 to GB2312 (Code Page 936, Sim pli fied Chi nese)
BIG5 to BIG5 (Code Page 950, Tra di tional Chinese)
Note: The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the Internal Symbol Set (0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets.
The scalable font does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic).
Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 may only be used with downloaded TrueType® fonts or the scalable font. Symbol sets
19-24 require the memory expansion option and a downloaded
International TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C for more information.
Example
{
I,A,0,0,1,1,0 p }
Powers up the printer in the online mode, displays prompts in English, prints a separator after each batch, prints zeros with slashes through them, and uses the internal symbol set.
2-10 Configuring the Printer
D e f i n i n g t h e S u p p l y S e t u p P a c k e t
Use the supply setup packet (B) to select supply type, ribbon, feed mode, supply position, and cut position.
Syntax
{ I,B,sup ply_type,rib bon_on,feed_mode,sup ply_posn, cut_posn,skip_in dex p}
B1. B Supply Setup Packet
B2. supply_type Supply Type. Options:
0 Black mark supply
1
2
Die Cut/edge aperture supply (default)
Continuous (non-indexed) supply
3
4
5
Center Aperture supply (9855/9860)
Reserved
Tag Edge Aperture (9855 RFID)
B3. ribbon_on
Note: You must use continuous supply in continuous mode. Do not use continuous supply with extended backfeed or 94x5 emulation.
If your aperture supply has holes on the edge, use 1.
If your aperture supply has holes in the center, use 3.
If your aperture supply has holes on the edge and contains an
RFID antenna, use 5.
Ribbon. Options:
0 Ribbon not installed
1
2
Ribbon installed (default)
High Energy Ribbon installed (9855/9860)
You must use a print speed of 2.5 IPS with the high energy ribbon. Serial bar codes cannot be printed using the high energy ribbon. Settings for ribbon and supply type must match the supplies loaded in the printer; otherwise, an error occurs. To clear the error, turn off the printer and change the configuration packet. Turn on the printer and resend the packet.
B4. feed_mode Feed Mode. Options:
0 Continuous operation (default)
1 On-demand mode
Configuring the Printer 2-11
B5. supply_posn Supply Position. Range: -300 to 300 in 1/203 inch. 0 is the default.
Adjusts the machine to print at the vertical 0,0 point on the supply. This adjustment accounts for mechanical tolerances from machine to machine.
The supply position adjustment only needs to be made on the initial machine setup. Adjust the supply position if formats do not start at the 0,0 point on the supply. Increase the supply position to move print up, decrease to move print down on the label. To verify the 0,0 point, print a test label. See “Printing a Test Label” in Chapter 8 for more information.
For the RFID printer, adjust the supply position according to the RFID
Setup Guide and Supply Chart.
B6. cut_posn
You can not change the supply position while the printer is active.
Changing the supply position will affect the print position, dispense position, and backfeed distance. Once the supply position is set, use the print control packet and backfeed control packet to adjust printing and the dispense position.
Cut position. Range: -300 to 300 in 1/203 inch. Use 0 for the 9825.
Adjusts where the tag is cut. The printer adjusts the cut position according to the black marks on the supply. You may need to adjust for aperture supplies. Increase to move the cut up, decrease to move the cut down.
Note: We do not recommend setting a positive cut position for any supply while using extended backfeed. You may cut off the leading edge of the next tag.
B7. skip_index Skip index mode. The 9825 printer does not support skip index mode. If using RFID supplies, do not use skip index mode. Options:
0
1
Disable skip index mode (default)
Enable skip mode. Allows the printer to skip a sense mark and print an image over multiple labels.
Example
{ I,B,0,0,1,10,50,1 p }
Indicates black mark and thermal direct stock has been loaded, causes the printer to operate in on-demand mode, feeds the supply approximately .05
inches up before printing the format on each label (10/203 inches), feeds the supply .25 inches (50/203 inches) before cutting, and enables skip index mode.
2-12 Configuring the Printer
D e f i n i n g t h e P r i n t C o n t r o l P a c k e t
Use the print control packet (c) to set the contrast, print, and margin adjustment, print speed, and printhead width.
Syntax
{ I,C,con trast,print_adj,mar gin_ad just,speed_adj, ph_width p }
C1. C
C2. contrast
C3. print_adj
Print Control Packet
Print Contrast. Range: -699 to 699. 0 is the default.
Print adjustment (position). Range: -99 to 99 (9825) or -450 to 450
(9855/9860) in 1/203 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts where data prints vertically on the supply. Increase the print position to move print up, decrease to move print down.
For the RFID printer, adjust the print position according to the RFID Setup
Guide and Supply Chart.
C4. margin_adj Margin adjustment (position). Range: -99 to 99 in 1/203 inch (or 1/300 inch for 9855/9860). 0 is the default. Adjusts where data prints horizontally on the supply. Increase the margin position to move print to the right, decrease to move print to the left. Margin and print position are format adjustments. They will not effect the supply position, dispense position, or backfeed distance.
C5. speed_adj Print Speed in inches per second (ips). Options:
0 Default (formats with serial bar codes automatically
25
40
60
80 print at 2.5 ips)
2.5 ips (default for serial bar codes)
4.0 ips
6.0 ips (default)
8.0 ips (9855/9860)
100 10.0 ips (9855 with 203 dpi)
120 12.0 ips (9855 with 203 dpi and high speed option)
C6. ph_width
Note: Serial bar codes with an 8-dot narrow element do not automatically print at 2.5 ips. Serial bar codes printed at speeds greater than
2.5 ips may not scan properly. However, the 985x and 9860 printers can print 203 dpi serial bar codes with narrow elements of
3 dots (or greater) at 4.0 ips. You must use a print speed of 2.5
ips with the high energy ribbon. See “Special Printing
Considerations,” in Chapter 6 for more information.
Width of the printhead in dots. Use 0.
Configuring the Printer 2-13
Example
{ I,C,0,-20,-10,0,0 p }
Uses the default contrast, moves print 0.1 inch closer to the bottom of the supply (20/203 inches) and .05 inch to the left on the supply (10/203 inches), prints at six inches per second, and uses the default printhead width.
D e f i n i n g t h e M o n e t a r y F o r m a t t i n g P a c k e t
The monetary formatting packet (D) selects the monetary symbols to print for a price field. Use the monetary formatting packet to select primary and secondary monetary symbols, and designate the number of digits to appear at the right of a decimal.
Syntax { I,D,cur_sym,sec ond ary,dec i mals p }
D1. D
D2. cur_sym
D3. secondary
Monetary Formatting Packet
Currency Symbol. Options:
0 No symbol
1
2
3
4
USA ($, Dollar- default)
UK ( £, Pound)
Japan (¥, Yen)
Germany ( 1, Deutsche Mark)
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
France (F, Franc)
Spain (P, Peseta)
Italy (L., Lira)
Sweden (Kr, Krona)
Finland ( 2, Markka)
Austria ( 6, Shilling)
India (Rs, Rupee)
Russian ( 3, Ruble)
Korean ( 4, Won)
Thai ( 5, Baht)
Chinese ( ¥, Yuan)
Euro-Dollar ( c
Note: To use these symbols, select the internal symbol set.
Secondary Sign. Secondary symbols only print if you designate at least one decimal place. Options:
0
1
No secondary sign (default)
Print secondary sign
2-14 Configuring the Printer
D4. decimals Number of digits to the right of the decimal. Options:
0 No digits
1
2
3
One digit
Two digits (default)
Three digits
{ I,D,1,1,2 p } Example
Prints the dollar sign, uses a secondary symbol, and places two digits to the right of the decimal.
D e f i n i n g t h e C o n t r o l C h a r a c t e r s P a c k e t
Use the control characters packet (E) to change the MPCLII control characters, enable and disable the immediate commands, and change the default terminator character for job requests and ENQ’s.
Changes take effect with the first character following the end of header character } of the configuration packet. Each control character must be unique and cannot appear anywhere else in your packet, except within quotation marks. You can customize the trailer characters to work with your host.
Note: Wait two seconds for the new characters to take effect before sending packets using the new characters.
If using symbol set 110 (Unicode UTF-8) to print International characters, set the MPCL control characters (start of header, etc.) to decimal values between 0 and 128; otherwise, errors may occur with the Unicode data entered.
Use the following syntax for the control characters packet. Notice all but the first parameter are within quotation marks.
Configuring the Printer 2-15
Syntax
E1. E
E2. “ANSI_cd”
E3. “string 1"
E4. “string 2"
{ I,E,"ANSI_cd","string1","string2" p }
Control Characters Packet
~123
~044
~034
~124
~125
~126
Start of header
Parameter ,
{ separator
Quoted strings
Field separator
End of header
Data escape character (optional)
“ p
}
~~
(left bracket)
(comma)
(quotes)
(pipe sign)
(right bracket)
(double tilde) def. ch.
Immediate command character (optional).
Up to any 3 characters in the 0 to 255 decimal range. The character must be defined before this command can be used. The caret (~094) is normally used.
Note: “ANSI_cd” includes seven separate parameters. The first five parameters are required. The other parameters are optional.
Terminator for status requests and ENQ requests. Up to any 3 characters in the 0-255 decimal range. The default is “013". Sending ”" disables this sequence.
Terminator for job requests and data uploads. Up to any 3 characters in the 0-255 decimal range. The default is none. Sending “” disables this sequence.
After you change these parameters, all packets, including any future configuration packets, must use the new control characters. We recommend using the tilde and ASCII character code sequence when sending this packet multiple times. Also, set the packet delimiters to characters within the 21 hex to 7E hex range.
You must send the control characters packet to enable the immediate commands. An immediate command executes immediately, even if it is embedded within quotation marks, and all data following the command in the string is ignored.
Example
{
I,E,"~123~063~034~124~125~126~094" p }
Changes the parameter separator character from , to ?. The other control characters remain unchanged. It also enables the immediate commands by defining the ^ symbol as the command identifier.
2-16 Configuring the Printer
R e s e t t i n g C o n t r o l C h a r a c t e r s
You can change the characters in the previous example back to their original settings by downloading this packet:
{ I?E?"~123~044~034~124~125~126~094" p }
Notice that the parameter separator is ? in this packet. This is the parameter separator that was set before this packet. Once the packet is received by the printer, the new parameter separator (a comma, in this case) is valid.
Be careful when using this feature. If you forget what the control characters were changed to, print a test label. (The test label lists the current control characters.) See “Printing a Test Label,” in Chapter 8 for more information.
U s i n g I m m e d i a t e C o m m a n d s
Immediate commands effect printer operation as soon as the printer receives them, even if they are included within a packet or used inside quotation marks.
You can use immediate commands to change immediate command or status polling control characters, reset the printer, or cancel and repeat batches.
E n a b l i n g I m m e d i a t e C o m m a n d s
When the printer is first turned on, these commands are not available. To use these commands, you must first send the control characters packet and define the immediate command control character. The immediate command control character is saved in non-volatile RAM so it is not lost after you turn off the printer. Once the immediate command control character is defined, the immediate commands are enabled.
Configuring the Printer 2-17
S e n d i n g I m m e d i a t e C o m m a n d s
Immediate commands consist of a three- or four-character sequence you can send in a packet or embed in your application. Each command must be sent separately.
Syntax control character_immediate command
The printer can accept only one immediate command at a time. Sending a command before the previous one is completed can result in an error.
Example
^CB
Immediately cancels the batch currently printing unless an error exists in the printer. This example assumes that the defined immediate command control character is the caret (^).
2-18 Configuring the Printer
Command Parameter
^CA Cancels all the batches in the queue unless an error exists on the printer.
^CB Cancels only the current batch being printed unless an error exists.
^DD or ^DCd Disables the MPCL data escape character (the tilde) and inhibits MPCL from acting on
ANY data escape sequence from the host. Sets the MPCL data escape character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can be any ASCII character.
^EA
^ER
Aborts an error condition. This command is the same as pressing ESCAPE/CLEAR to clear an error. May need to be sent multiple times. Use ^RB to reprint batch.
CAUTION: This command causes the current batch to stop and the condition that caused the error to remain uncorrected.
Resets the error. This command is the same as pressing FEED/CUT to acknowledge an error. Normal operation resumes.
^FD
^FF1
Feeds a label when printer is idle. Simulates the operation of pressing FEED/CUT and dispenses the next label if printer is in the on-demand mode.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
Formats flash memory
^FF2 Returns the amount (in bytes) of the available flash memory.
^GD
^MR
Disables the conversion of formats designed in 203 dpi dot units to 300 dpi.
^GE Enables the conversion of formats designed in 203 dpi dot units (not English or Metric) to 300 dpi.
^ID or ^ICd Disables the Immediate Command feature by turning off the Immediate Command escape character. Sets the Immediate Command escape character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can be any ASCII character. Use ^IE to enable immediate commands.
^MC Returns the customer ID or RPQ version to the host. (00 to 99)
^MD Returns the printhead dot density to the host. 00 = 203 dpi 01 = 300 dpi
^MI Returns the customer ID or RPQ revision level to the host. (00 to 99)
^MM
^MP
Returns the model number to the host. 17 = 9825 18 = 9855
19 = 9860
Returns the prototype number to the host. (00 to 99)
Returns the revision number to the host. (00 to 99)
^MV Returns the version number to the host. (00 to 99)
^PR Resets the printer. This command takes five seconds to complete and then the printer is ready to receive data. It has the same effect as turning off and then turning on the printer.
Note: Command should be used only when the printer is not printing.
Configuring the Printer 2-19
Command Parameter
^RB
^SFa
Repeats the last printed batch, printing the same number of labels as specified in the original batch. This command does not work if using batch separators.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^RS Resynchronizes supply when supply roll is changed.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^SD or ^SCd Disables the status polling feature by turning off the status polling control character.
Sets the status polling control character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter.
The value of d can be any ASCII character.
Loads script with host response.
^SFb Loads script without host response.
^SFc Enables script.
^SFd Disables script.
^SFe Uploads script version information.
^SFf Deletes script.
^SFg Turns on ENQ status polling before it reaches the script.
^SFh Turns off ENQ status polling before it reaches the script.
^SFi Turns on immediate commands before it reaches the script.
^SFj Turns off immediate commands before it reaches the script.
^TP
^VLC
^VLD
Prints a test label.
Note: Printer ignores this command if printing.
Only clears the data that has been uploaded, not all the logged data. Data is cleared with this command after a successful upload. We recommend clearing the log file after uploading.
Disables verifier data logging (default when the printer is reset).
^VLE Enables verifier data logging.
^VLU Uploads the log file to the last port that received host data (serial, parallel, USB, or
Ethernet). Repeat this command until data is successfully uploaded. Data can be cleared after it has been uploaded.
The table represents the defined immediate command control character as ^ and the defined status polling control character as d. You may define these characters to suit your needs.
Note: To use the immediate command control character or the status polling character within your data, use the tilde sequence.
2-20 Configuring the Printer
D e f i n i n g t h e C o m m u n i c a t i o n S e t t i n g s P a c k e t
Use the communication settings packet (F) to set the baud rate, word length, stop bits, parity, and flow control for serial communications. To set parallel communications, see “Using Parallel Communications.”
Changing the communication settings takes approximately two seconds.
Communications sent during this interval will be lost. Make sure the host communication values match the values on the printer and the host is capable of communicating at the speed you select for the printer.
Do not add any characters, such as a carriage return/line feed, in your communication settings packet or communications errors may occur.
Syntax
{ I,F,baud,word_length,stop_bits,par ity, flow_con trol p }
F1. F
F2. baud
Communication Settings Packet
Baud Rate. Only the 9855 and 9860 printers support baud rates greater than 38400. Options:
0 1200
2 4800
1 2400
3 9600 (default)
4 19200
6 57600
5 38400
7 115200.
F3. word_length Word Length. Options:
0 7-bit word length
1 8-bit word length (default)
F4. stop_bits Stop Bits. Options:
0
1
1-stop bit (default)
2-stop bits
F5. parity Parity. Options:
0 None (default)
1
2
ODD parity
EVEN parity
F6. flow_control Flow Control. Options:
0
1
None
DTR (default)
2
3
(CTS)
XON/XOFF
Note: If you use the DOS COPY command to download your formats, set
“Flow Control” to DTR (not XON/XOFF).
Configuring the Printer 2-21
Example
{ I,F,3,1,0,0,1 p }
Uses 9600 baud, an 8-bit word length, one stop bit, no parity, and the DTR mode.
D e f i n i n g t h e B a c k f e e d C o n t r o l P a c k e t
Use the backfeed control packet (G) to enable or disable the backfeed option, set the dispense position and the backfeed distance. Backfeed works by advancing each printed label to the desired dispense position.
Once that label is removed, the next label to be printed is backed up underneath the printhead. In continuous mode, only the last label in the batch is advanced to the dispense position. You may need to adjust the dispense position to allow labels to be removed, die cut labels to be removed easily, or to prevent them from falling off.
Extended backfeed is available on the 9855 printer with a knife installed.
Extended backfeed feeds a tag far enough out to be cut and backfeeds the next tag to the printhead line. You can not change the backfeed distance while the printer is active.
Extended backfeed eliminates printed tags being left between the printhead and knife. Extended backfeed does not work with non-indexed (continuous) supply/mode. We do not recommend using extended backfeed when sensing on attacher-hole supplies.
The 9860 printer automatically backfeeds when necessary. Backfeed is also cut-mode dependent. See “Defining the Batch Control Field” in Chapter 6 for more information about the best cut mode for your application.
Do not use backfeed (normal or extended) with supplies less than 0.75
inches. We recommend using 0.5-inch gap supplies in peel mode when backfeed is disabled.
The dispense position and backfeed distance are optional parameters and do not have to be specified. However, they allow for greater precision when positioning the supply.
2-22 Configuring the Printer
Syntax
G1. G
G2. action
G3. dis_pos
G4. bkfd_dis
Example
{ I,G,action,dis_pos,bkfd_dis p }
Backfeed Control Packet
Action. If using one-inch RFID Supplies, do not use backfeed. Options:
0 disable backfeed (default)
1
2 enable backfeed (use on any printer without a knife) enable extended backfeed (use on any printer with a knife)
Note: We do not recommend setting a positive cut position for any supply while using extended backfeed. You may cut off the leading edge of the next tag.
Dispense Position. Adjusts the stopping point of the label. 50 to 200 dots
(default 65 dots). Use 95 dots for the printer applicator.
Backfeed Distance. Amount to move label backwards. 10 to 200 dots
(default 65 dots). Use 95 dots for the printer applicator. This distance can not be greater than the dispense position.
The backfeed distance should equal the dispense position. An exception is if you are tearing instead of peeling. Then, the backfeed distance must be
30 dots (.150 inches) less than the dispense position. However, you will have a 30 dot non-print zone on your supply. The 30-dot difference accounts for improper tearing of butt cut supplies, because you do not want any exposed adhesive under the printhead.
{ I,G,2 p }
Enables extended backfeed and cuts any tags remaining between the knife and printhead and moves the supply backwards so the next tag is underneath the printhead. Using cut mode 4, you do not have to press
FEED/CUT to cut the last tag.
Example { I,G,1,50,10 p }
Enables backfeed and sets the dispense position to 0.25 inches (50/203) and the backfeed distance to 0.05 inches (10/203).
Configuring the Printer 2-23
S p e c i a l C o n s i d e r a t i o n s W h e n U s i n g B a c k f e e d
Make a note of the following items:
¨ Be careful when tearing supplies, because the adhesive can adhere to the printhead or platen roller.
¨ Backfeed affects each label in the on-demand mode or the first and last label of the batch in continuous mode.
¨ When backfeed is enabled and multiple batches are sent, the printer may not backfeed between each batch.
¨ Backfeed should only be used when you need to advance labels to the desired dispense point.
¨ Backfeed does not interfere with the supply, print, or margin positions you have set.
¨ If the supply inter-label gap is not between .07 inch to .15 inch (14 to 30 dots), you must adjust the dispense position and backfeed distance accordingly.
See the following graphic for a representation of the following adjustments: dispense position, backfeed distance, supply position, print position, and margin position.
Contact Technical Support if you have problems adjusting where the format prints on the supply.
2-24 Configuring the Printer
1
1.5
2
2.5
153
229.5
D e f i n i n g t h e M e m o r y C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a c k e t
Use the memory configuration packet (M) to customize the size of your printer’s buffers, which gives you greater flexibility in your formats.
Memory must be allocated in 1/2K increments. The memory configuration packet does not accept decimals, so enter whole numbers. Multiply the amount to reallocate (in K) by 10. For example,
To reallocate (in K) Enter this amount
10
15
20
25
1530
2295
Each buffer’s allocated memory remains in effect until that buffer is reallocated. For this reason, you may want to reallocate all the buffers when reallocating any buffer. If you reallocate more memory than you have available, you will receive an error.
Syntax { I,M,buffer,de vice,buffer_size p }
M1. M
M2. buffer
M3. device
Memory Configuration Packet
Buffer type. Options:
D Downloadable Fonts
I
F Format
Image
R
T
V
Receive
Transmit
Scalable (vector) fonts
Storage type. Options:
F Flash Memory
R Volatile RAM
Note: You cannot reallocate flash memory.
Configuring the Printer 2-25
M4. buffer size Buffer size in 1/10K ranges. The following table lists the configured buffer sizes and min-max values for your printer. The printer ’s configuration is stored in non-volatile RAM and retained when you turn off the printer. The max. value for each buffer is listed; however, the sum of all the buffers cannot exceed the max. available memory of the printer.
Buffer Type 9825* 9855/9860
Transmit
Receive
Image
Volatile 2K (.5K- 4K) 64K (.5K- 128K)
Volatile 8K (2K- 64K) 64K (2K- 128K)
Volatile 330K (41.5K- 640K) 330K (41.5K- 6144K)
Downld. Fonts Volatile 64K (8K- 640K)
Scalable Fonts Volatile 64K (32K-640K)
Formats
Internal
Volatile 64K (16K- 640K)
NA cannot reallocate
64K (8K- 8192K)
384K (32K-8192K)
128K (16K- 1024K) cannot reallocate
* The 9825, 9855, and 9860 printers do not have non-volatile RAM; however, you can store formats, fonts, and graphics in flash memory. Change the storage device of your packets to “F” instead of “N.”
Use the following table to see how much memory is available to reallocate.
RAM*
Volatile RAM 1 Meg
9825
8 Meg
9855/9860
* You cannot reallocate more memory than what is available, or you will receive an error. Memory expansion is an option available on the 9855 and 9860 printers.
Example
{ I,M,I,R,1530 p }
Stores the image buffer in volatile RAM and allocates 153K for it.
2-26 Configuring the Printer
C h e c k i n g C u r r e n t B u f f e r S i z e s
Send a configuration upload packet to check the sizes of your current buffers. See “Configuration Packet Header” for more information. After you check your current buffer sizes you can begin reallocating memory.
If you want to increase your image buffer and you will not be using scalable fonts, add that memory into your image buffer.
Example
{
I,M,R,R,20 p
M,T,R,10 p
M,D,R,80 p
M,V,R,160 p
M,I,R,3200 p }
Receive buffer 2K
Transmit buffer 1K
Downloadable fonts 8K
Scalable fonts buffer 16K
Image buffer 320K
Make sure memory is available before adding memory to a buffer. In the above example, if the image buffer (M,I,R,3200) was defined before the downloadable fonts and scalable fonts buffers (M,D,R,80 and M,V,R,160) were defined, an error would have occurred.
A b o u t M e m o r y B u f f e r s
Transmit Buffer Used to send ENQ, job, and upload responses. This buffer must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
Receive Buffer
Image Buffer
Used to save data received from the host before it is processed by the printer. Changing this buffer size affects the amount of data the printer can receive without using flow control. This buffer must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
Used to image the current format. The printers support two 4-inch by 8-inch buffers. You can create an image up to 16 inches long without reallocating memory. The
Image Buffer is cleared after a printer reset.
Configuring the Printer 2-27
Use the formula below to calculate the approximate image buffer size.
21K x Length (for 203 dpi) OR
46K x Length (for 300 dpi)
Length is the length of your label in inches.
203 DPI Example 21K x 25 = 525
(Multiply by 10 and round up to the next whole number if necessary)
525K x 10 = 5250
Enter 5250 for your Image buffer.
300 DPI Example 46K x 26.75 = 1230.5
(Multiply by 10 and round up to the next whole number if necessary)
Format Buffer
1230.5 x 10 = 12305
Enter 12305 for your Image buffer.
Used to store formats, batch data, and graphics. Use the following formula to calculate the required format buffer size:
Linecount x 50/1024
Linecount is the number of lines in your format packet including the format header and all the options.
The result of the above calculation is in kilobytes.
Formats remain in memory when you turn off the printer.
2-28 Configuring the Printer
Downloadable
Fonts Buffer
Scalable (Vector)
Fonts Buffer
Used to store downloaded soft (bitmapped or TrueType) fonts. To determine the size of your downloadable fonts, send a font packet. For TrueType fonts, the file size, in bytes, is the minimum amount needed in this buffer. See “Using the Font Packet” for more information.
Used to image the scalable or downloaded (TrueType or bitmapped) font characters. Increasing this buffer size allows more characters to be saved in cache memory, so the characters do not have to be re-built the next time they are printed. Use 0 if you are not using scalable/TrueType fonts. This buffer must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
The printer does not print the fonts if there is not enough memory in this buffer to image them.
Configuring the Printer 2-29
B u f f e r W o r k s h e e t
Make copies of this page to use as a buffer worksheet.
B u f f e r A l l o c a t i o n C o n s i d e r a t i o n s
Keep these items in mind when allocating memory.
¨ Do not allocate more memory than what is available.
¨ Free memory from one buffer before you add it to another buffer.
¨ Reallocate all the buffers if you need to reallocate any buffer.
¨ Send all buffer (re)allocations in one packet. The printer evaluates each individual buffer allocation separately. If one buffer allocation is invalid, the entire packet is invalid. If you define a buffer size that exceeds the maximum value, an error occurs. However, no information is lost.
¨ Whenever the printer accepts a memory configuration packet, it takes effect immediately, causing a printer reset. Any information contained in the buffers is lost. Resend your formats, batches, graphics, or fonts to the printer.
2-30 Configuring the Printer
¨ If you remap your image buffer, make sure the length and width specified in your format header are not too large for the current image buffer. In other words, if you remap for a 4 x 4 inch label, you cannot print a 4 x 6 inch label without receiving an error, until you change your format header or increase your image buffer.
M e m o r y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s w i t h D o w n l o a d e d Tr u e Ty p e F o n t s
¨ The size of the TrueType font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory you must have available in the downloadable fonts buffer.
¨ The scalable (vector) fonts buffer is used to image the downloaded fonts
(TrueType). If you are using several downloaded TrueType fonts, you may need 100K or more in this buffer. The printer does not print the fonts if there is not enough memory in the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
¨ To use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), you must reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
¨ Font storage is limited on the 9825 printer, because there is no extended memory available.
F o r m a t t i n g F l a s h M e m o r y
Before you send packets to flash memory, it must be formatted first. This is
required once during initial printer setup. From the Main Menu, select
Setup, Flash Memory, then Format Flash. The process takes a few minutes.
Note: When you format flash memory, all packets (formats, fonts, graphics, etc.) stored in flash memory are deleted and must be resent to the printer.
Configuring the Printer 2-31
F l a s h M e m o r y G u i d e l i n e s
Use these basic guidelines for storing files in flash memory.
¨ Your printer may have volatile RAM (packets deleted when the printer is turned off), non-volatile RAM (packets saved when the printer is turned off), and flash memory (packets saved when the printer is turned off).
Each printer has a different limit of available memory.
¨ Before you save any packets in flash memory, you must format flash memory first. See “Formatting Flash Memory” for more information.
¨ Formats, graphics, and check digits can be saved in flash (but they are also duplicated in RAM). Any packets saved in flash cannot exceed the memory available in RAM.
¨ Packets with the same number should not be added to flash memory. If two packets with the same number are stored in flash, only the last packet sent can be used. For example, if you send the following packets to flash memory, only the “Textiles” format can be used.
{F,10,A,F,E,300,200,"UPC" p}
{F,10,A,F,E,300,200,"Textiles" p}
¨ Fonts are stored differently in flash. For example, the 9825 printer has very limited flash font memory and one TrueType font may exceed that limit. For TrueType or double-byte fonts, use a 9855 or 9860 printer with the memory expansion option.
¨ There is not a 1-to-1 ratio between the memory in your printer and the memory in your PC. For example, a file that is 5K in Windows may require 15-20K to store in your printer.
¨ When using graphics, use the lowest-resolution graphic possible. If your printer uses a 203 dpi printhead, the graphic’s resolution should be 150 to 200 dpi. In fact, 96 dpi may work. Try to create the smallest file size possible.
¨ Use temporary storage for graphics that are only used once or twice.
However, if you have a logo that is used on multiple formats, save the graphic in flash. Once again, try to create the smallest file size possible for your graphic.
2-32 Configuring the Printer
¨ Each line in a packet requires the same amount of memory. The smaller the format, the less memory required to save it.
¨ Flash memory cannot be reallocated.
C l e a r i n g P a c k e t s f r o m M e m o r y
You may want to remove packets from the printer to increase memory storage capacity or if the formats/fonts are no longer needed. In some cases, turning the printer off may clear the packets from memory. If not, send a format clear packet.
Syntax
{header,packet#,action,device p }
1. header
2. packet#
3. action
4. device
Identifies the packet. Options:
A Check Digit Scheme
F
G
W
Format
Graphic
Font
Identification number of the packet to clear (1 to 999) or font number
(0 to 9999). 0 is for all fonts.
Action. Enter C to clear the packet.
Storage device. Options:
F Flash
R Volatile RAM
Example
{F,1,C,R p }
Clears Format #1 from volatile RAM.
Configuring the Printer 2-33
U s i n g t h e F o n t P a c k e t
You can use a font packet to add or clear downloaded fonts from memory, upload your font buffer, or upload the cell size information for a particular font. The font packet is useful when you are downloading fonts. If you are using downloaded fonts, the font number and the number of bytes each downloaded font uses is listed.
This packet does not list the number of bytes the standard printer fonts use.
Use the MONARCH® MPCL Toolbox Font Utility (available on our Web site) to create the font header and data. Refer to the online help for more information.
Syntax
{W,font#,action,device,data_length,data_record p }
W1. W
W2. font#
W3. action
Writable Font Header.
The font identifier from 0 to 9999.
0 is for all fonts. 1 - 5 digits is the font number.
Example: 3 is the standard printer font, Bold.
Action. Options:
A Adds the specified font.
C
H
M
Clears all or specified fonts, except ones in flash.
Uploads font size information.
Uploads font memory usage information.
Note: C does not clear (erase) fonts saved in the printer ’s flash memory.
You must format flash memory to erase fonts from the printer ’s flash memory. However, when you format flash memory, ALL fonts saved in the printer ’s flash memory are deleted.
W4. device Device. Options:
F Flash
R
Z
Volatile RAM
All devices (use for upload).
W5. data_length
(optional)
The length of the font data. The range is 68 to 16384.
If you are creating fonts, you need to have font data included with this packet.
W6. data_ record
(optional)
Multiple data records define the font. The first character is either an
H (hex) or an R (run-length), referring to the algorithm. The rest of the record is up to 2710 characters of font data in double quotes. Separate the algorthm and the data with a comma, and end the record with p .
2-34 Configuring the Printer
Example
{W,0,M,R p }
Selects all fonts and checks the memory usage in RAM. The printer returns the following to the host:
{W,0,M,R p
Number of bytes free, Number of bytes used p }
Example
{W,0,H,Z p }
Selects all fonts and uploads the font size information for any downloaded fonts.
The 9855 printer returns the following to the host:
{W,0,H,Z p Font Style
Font Name
0,1,0,"Standard",0,0,0,14,22,14,22,3 p
0,1,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
0,1,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
Spacing
Baseline
0,1,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
0,1,945,"X5 Standard",1,0,0,15,24,16,24,0 p
0,2,0,"Reduced",0,0,0,7,14,7,14,1 p
0,2,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
0,2,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
0,2,850,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
Cell Height
Nominal Width
0,2,945,"X5 Reduced",1,0,0,7,16,7,14,0 p
0,3,0,"Bold",0,0,0,24,34,24,34,3 p
0,3,945,"X5 Bold",1,0,0,30,48,26,36,0 p
0,4,0,"OCRA",0,0,0,13,24,13,24,3 p
0,5,945,"X5 OCRA",1,0,0,16,26,15,26,3 p
0,5,0,"HR1",0,0,0,12,20,12,20,2 p
0,6,945,"X5 HR1",1,0,0,12,20,15,26,2 p
Type
0,6,0,"HR2",0,0,0,10,16,10,16,1 p
0,7,945,"X5 HR2",1,0,0,9,15,15,26,1 p
0,10,0,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
Symbol Set
0,10,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
0,10,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
0,10,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0 p
0,11,0,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
Configuring the Printer 2-35
0,11,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
0,11,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
0,11,850,"CGTriumv6",1,0,5,17,21,5,10,0 p
0,15,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0 p
0,15,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0 p
0,15,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0 p
0,15,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0 p
0,16,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0 p
0,16,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0 p
0,16,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0 p
0,16,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0 p
0,17,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0 p
0,17,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0 p
0,17,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0 p
0,17,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0 p
0,18,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0 p
0,18,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0 p
0,18,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0 p
0,18,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0 p
0,510,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0 p
0,510,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,21,28,9,14,0 p
0,510,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0 p
0,510,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,7,22,28,9,14,0 p
0,511,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0 p
0,511,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,28,35,12,18,0 p
0,511,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0 p
0,511,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,8,29,35,12,18,0 p
0,512,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0 p
0,512,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,31,40,13,22,0 p
0,512,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0 p
0,512,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0 p
0,513,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0 p
0,513,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,47,59,20,31,0 p
0,513,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0 p
0,513,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,13,49,59,20,31,0 p
0,70,0,"Paxar15",1,0,7,32,42,22,42,0 p
0,71,0,"Paxar18",1,0,9,34,51,27,51,0 p
2-36 Configuring the Printer
0,72,0,"Nafta15",1,0,6,32,42,32,41,0 p
0,73,0,"Nafta18",1,0,8,48,51,46,50,0 p
0,21,0,"ZIAFont",0,0,0,5,9,5,9,1 p
0,22,0,"ZIBFont",0,0,0,7,11,7,11,2 p
0,23,0,"ZICFont",0,0,0,10,18,10,18,2 p
0,24,0,"ZIDFont",0,0,0,10,18,10,18,2 p
0,25,0,"ZIEFont",0,0,0,15,28,15,28,5 p
0,26,0,"ZIFFont",0,0,0,13,26,13,26,3 p
0,27,0,"ZIGFont",0,0,0,40,60,40,60,8 p
0,50,0,"EffSwissBold",1,1,92248 p
0,56,0,"PaxSymbols",1,1,12260 p }
* The CG Triumvirateä typefaces are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Fonts 21-27 are only for the 9855 ML Iä printer.
Note: Fonts 510, 511, 512, and 513 are the same as fonts 15, 16, 17, and
18.
Spacing
Type
Monospaced (0) or proportional (1).
Bitmapped (0) or scalable (1).
Baseline
Cell Width
Cell Height
Nominal Width
Bottom of the font.
Horizontal number of dots to contain the widest character.
Vertical number of dots to contain the tallest character.
Average width for lower-case letters.
Nominal Height
Inter-Character
Gap
Average height for lower-case letters.
Default spacing between characters in monospaced fonts.
Printhead Density Displays whether a 203 (0) dpi or 300 (1) dpi printhead is used. The scalable font (font 50) does not display which printhead (203 dpi or 300 dpi) is used.
Configuring the Printer 2-37
U p l o a d i n g F o r m a t H e a d e r I n f o r m a t i o n
You can upload format header information from the formats in memory to check the supply length and width for each format. Formats stored in Flash memory are loaded into RAM when the 9855 or 9860 printer boots.
However, the formats remain in Flash memory when you turn off the printer.
Syntax
{header,format#,action,device p }
F1. header
F2. format#
F3. action
F4. device
Example
Format Header
Format number from 0 to 999. 0 is for all formats in memory.
Action. Options:
A Adds the specified format
C
H
Clears the specified format
Uploads format header information
Device. Options:
F Flash
R
Z
Volatile RAM
All devices (use for upload)
{F,0,H,Z p }
Selects all formats in memory and returns the following:
Example
{F,0,H,Z p
Fmt_1,406,406
p
Fmt_10,324,406 p
Fmt_15,812,812 p
Fmt_20,305,609
p
Fmt_25,1218,406 p }
Displays the format number, supply length and supply width (in dots) for each format in memory.
Example
{F,1,H,Z
p }
Selects format1 and returns the following to the host:
{F,1,H,Z p
Fmt_1,406,406 }
Displays the supply length and supply width (in dots) for format1.
2-38 Configuring the Printer
D e f i n i n g a Ve r i f i e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a c k e t
With the verifier configuration packet you can customize the verifier for each format you print. You can select which bar codes to scan, the acceptable
ANSI grade levels, quiet zone, X-dimension range, and more. You can download the Monarch® Verifier Configuration Tool (from our Web site) to create this packet or follow the syntax below.
Syntax
{V,format#,action,device,"name" p
D,"vfr_comds" p }
V1. V
V2. format#
Verifier Configuration Packet.
Number from 0 to 999 to identify the format number that corresponds to this particular verifier configuration packet. However, you can assign a verifier configuration packet to any format even if the format number is not changed. See “Defining Verifier Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Note: You can specify up to 50 different verifier configurations for your formats.
V3. action
V4. device
V5. “name”
Action. Enter A to add a verifier configuration.
Storage device. Options:
F Flash. Stores the verifier configuration in the printer.
Packets stored in flash memory are saved when the power is turned off.
T Temporary. Passes the packet through the printer and stores the packet in the verifier. Packets stored in temporary memory are lost when the power is turned off.
Packet name, 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks. The name you enter here is shown as a custom configuration on the menu for MODE.
Refer to your verifier ’s Operating Instructions (available on our Web site) for more information.
Non-Printable Text/Data Field.
D1. D
D2. “vfr_comds” Verifier commands. Must be enclosed within quotation marks. Refer to the
SV Series Operator’s Guide for the complete list of verifier commands.
Configuring the Printer 2-39
Example
{V,1,A,T,"BEAMON" p
D,"~LV02" p }
The verifier’s configuration packet ID is “1" and named ”BEAMON." The verifier packet is added to temporary memory. It uses Mode 2.
D e f i n i n g a N e t w o r k C o n s o l e P a c k e t
The network console packet is only valid on a 9855 or 9860 Version 2.0 (or greater) printer containing MonarchNet2ä software for the Monarch® 7410ä or Monarch ® 7411ä Ethernet Print Server. Use the network console packet to send console commands directly to the network card via the printer’s serial port. If the network card does not appear to be communicating with the printer, you can use the network console packet to change the SSID, IP
Address, etc. of the network card.
Syntax
{N,number,action,device,"name" p
C,"con_comds" p }
N1. N
N2. number
N3. action
N4. device
Network Console Packet.
Number from 0 to 999 to identify the network console packet.
Action. Enter A to add a verifier configuration.
Storage device. Enter T to pass the packet through the printer and store the packet in the network card.
N5. “name”
C1. C
Packet name, 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks.
Command field.
C2. “con_comds” Console commands. Must be enclosed within quotation marks. Each command must be on a separate line. The maximum number of characters per command is 100. Refer to the list of console commands in the
MonarchNet2 Operating Instructions for more information.
Note: The maximum number of commands per packet is twenty five (25).
Example
{N,1,A,T,"mystore" p
C,"set ip me static" p
C,"init" p
C,"exit" p }
Sends the network console packet 1 “my store” directly to the network card
(T) and sets the IP method to static for determining the IP Addresses. The
Init and Exit commands must be used to save changes and initialize the network card.
2-40 Configuring the Printer
D e f i n i n g t h e R F I D S e t u p P a c k e t f o r U H F
This packet is only valid on 9855 RFID printers. Use the RFID setup packet
(X) to set the protocol, write attempts, read power, write power, and signal adjust.
Note: Refer to the RFID Setup Guide and Supply Chart for the read and write power settings and signal adjustment based on your RFID supplies.
Syntax
{I,X,protocol,write_attem,read_power, write_power,signal_adjust¦}
X1. X
X2. protocol
RFID Setup Packet
Select the UHF protocol. The default is 0. Options:
1
2
3
0 C1Gen2 (Class 1 Gen 2)
C1Gen1 96 (Class 1 Gen 1 96-bit)
C1Gen1 EPC64/96 (Class 1 Gen 1 EPC64/96)
EM4122
X3. write_attem The number of times the interrogator tries to program the RFID tag in the
RF Field. The range is 1 – 5. The default is 3.
X4. read_power The amount of power to read an RFID tag. The range is 1 – 25. For the
Japanese frequency, the range is 1 – 10. The default is 18.
X5. write_power The amount of power to write (program) an RFID tag. The range is 1 – 25.
For the Japanese frequency, the range is 1 – 10. The default is 18.
X6. signal_adjust The strength of the RF Field emitted by the printer ’s antenna. The higher the value, the greater the power of the RF Field. The signal adjustment varies depending on the selected protocol. The range is 2 – 10. The default is 2.
Example
{I,X,0,3,10,10,6¦}
Uses the default protocol (Class 1 Gen 2), sets the number of write attempts to 3, sets the read and write power to 10 and the signal adjustment to 6.
Configuring the Printer 2-41
D e f i n i n g t h e R F I D S e t u p P a c k e t f o r H F
This packet is only valid on 9855 RFID printers. Use the RFID setup packet
(X) to set the protocol, write attempts and attenuation.
Note: Refer to the HF Setup Guide and Supply Chart for the protocol and attenuation settings based on your RFID supplies.
Syntax
{I,X,protocol,write_attem,attenuation¦}
X1. X
X2. protocol
RFID Setup Packet
Select the HF protocol. The default is 0. Options:
2
3
0
1
AUTO-Select
TI ISO15693
NXP ISO15693
I-CODE UID
X3. write_attem The number of times the interrogator tries to program the RFID tag in the
RF Field. The range is 1 – 4. The default is 3.
X4. attenuation The amount of power to read an RFID tag. The range is 1 – 4. The default is 2.
Example {I,X,0,3,2¦}
Uses the default protocol (AUTO-Select), sets the number of write attempts to 3 and the attenuation to 2.
2-42 Configuring the Printer
D E F I N I N G F I E L D S
This chapter provides a reference for defining
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨ the format header text and constant text bar code fields line and box fields verifier fields
RFID data fields.
3
Defining Fields 3-1
D e f i n i n g t h e F o r m a t H e a d e r
A Format Header begins a format file.
Syntax
{F,format#,action,device,measure,length, width,"name" p
F1. F
F2. format#
F3. action
F4. device
F5. measure
Format Header.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the format.
Action. Enter A to add the format to the printer.
Format storage device. Options:
F Flash (must be formatted first. See “Formatting Flash”
and “Flash Memory Guidelines” in Chapter 2 for more information.)
R Volatile RAM
Unit of measure. E (English - in 1/100 inches), M (Metric -in 1/10 mm), or
G (Graphic - in dots). See the following table.
F6. length
F7. width
F8. “name”
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Supply
Length
75-1600
191-4064
152-3248
75-1200
191-3048
225-3600
75-1300
191-3302
152-2639
225-3900
Supply
Width
32-400
81-1016
62-812
32-400
81-1016
96-1200
75-400
191-1016
152-812
225-1200
Supply length in selected units. Measure supply from the leading edge of one label to the leading edge of the next label. Use the table above.
Note: You can create longer images if you reallocate memory to increase your image buffer. See "Defining the Memory Packet" in Chapter 2 for more information.
Width, from left to right, in selected units. Use the table above.
Format name (optional), 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks.
The range is 1 to 256 characters for the 9855 XML-enabled printer.
3-2 Defining Fields
Example
{F,1,A,R,E,300,200,"TEXTILES" p
Adds Format 1 (“TEXTILES”) to the printer. It uses a three inch long by two inch wide label.
D e f i n i n g Te x t F i e l d s
Create a separate definition for each text field. If text falls on two lines, each line of text requires a separate definition.
Syntax
T1. T
T2. field#
T3. # of char
T4. fix/var
T5. row
T,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column, gap,font,hgt mag,wid mag,color,alignment, char rot,field rot,sym set p
Text Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify this field.
Maximum number of printed characters (0 to 2710) in the field.
Fixed or variable length field. Options:
F Fixed length
V Variable length
For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to the pivot point. The pivot point varies depending on how text is justified.
For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to baseline of characters in field.
Defining Fields 3-3
T6. column
T7. gap
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
Distance from the left edge of the print area to the pivot point to find the column location. Use previous table for values.
Number of dots between characters 203 dpi (or 300 dpi for 9855/9860 printers). Range: 0 to 99.
Note: For monospaced fonts, the additional spacing is added to the existing inter-character gap. This is also true for proportionally spaced fonts, but remember that the inter-character gap varies with character combinations.
Any number other than 0 or the default number affects your field width.
Default spacing:
Standard
Reduced
Bold
OCRA-like
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface Bold
CG Triumvirateä Typeface
3 dots
1 dot
3 dots
3 dots varies with each letter varies with each letter
3-4 Defining Fields
T8. font
T9. hgt mag
T10. wid mag
T11. color
4
5
6
2
3
Style of font. Options:
1 Standard
Reduced
Bold
OCRA-like
HR1
HR2
10 CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold
11 CG Triumvirateä Typeface
15 7 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
16 9 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
17 11 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
18 15 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
50 EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType® Scalable)
56 PaxarSymbols (version 5.0 or greater)
Or a valid downloaded font selector number.
Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only.
The CG Triumvirateä typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS Code
Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font does not support Code
Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C for more information.
Height magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally spaced fonts, because characters lose smoothness at higher magnifications. See
Appendix B, “Fonts,” for more information about fonts.
Width magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a set width. To estimate the size of your field, use the letter “W” for the widest field or an
“L” for an average width field. Find your selected font and the desired width in Appendix B, “Fonts.”
Note: To use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), you must reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
There are two types of field color overlay attributes:
Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does not block out
(or “erase”) existing fields.
Opaque The overlay field blocks out (or “erases”) existing fields.
Options for standard printer fonts:
B Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
D/R/W
O
Opaque, Normal, White, Normal
Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Options for scalable fonts:
A/N Opaque, Normal, Black, Bold
B/O
E/S
F/T
Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
Opaque, Italics, Black, Bold
Opaque, Italics, Black, Normal
Note: Solid black print should not exceed 30% on a given square inch of the label, or the printhead life may be decreased.
Defining Fields 3-5
Line field blocked out by opaque field using attribute B
Line field not blocked out by transparent field using attribute O
Field placement in the packet is an important consideration when using field color attributes. If a line field is defined before the overlay (text or constant text) field, the line field is blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay field’s color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay field, the line field is not blocked out by the overlay field, regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.
T12. alignment Options:
L
C
R
B
E
Align on left side of field.
Center text within field (monospaced fonts only)
Align on right side of field (monospaced fonts only)
Align at midpoint of field
Align at endpoint of the field
Use L, B, or E for any font.
T13. char rot Character rotation. The field or supply does not rotate, only the characters do. Options:
0
1
Top of character points to top of field
Top of character points to left of field
2
3
Top of character points to bottom of field
Top of character points to right of field
3-6 Defining Fields
T14. field rot Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the characters.
Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on how text is justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:
0 Top of field points to top of supply
1
2
3
Top of field points to left of supply
Top of field points to bottom of supply
Top of field points to right of supply
T15. sym set
Symbol set. Use 0 for the Internal Symbol Set. For scalable or TrueTypeâ fonts, use:
1
100
ANSI Symbol Set
Macintosh
101
102
103
104
105
Wingdings
Unicode (user input) for particular mapping
BIG5 (user input) for Unicode mapping
GB2312 (user input) for Unicode mapping
106
SJIS (user input) for Unicode mapping
Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)
GB2312 (user input) for GB2312 mapping
Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)
107
110
437
850
852
855
857
BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping
Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)
Unicode UTF-8
DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)
DOS Code Page 850 (International)
DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
860 DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
1250 Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
1251 Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
1252 Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
1253 Code Page 1253 (Greek)
1254 Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
1255 Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
1256 Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
1257 Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
1258 Code Page 1258 (Vietnam)
Defining Fields 3-7
Note: The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the Internal Symbol Set (0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets.
The scalable font (font#50) does not support Code Page 1256
(Arabic). Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 are for downloaded
TrueType fonts or the scalable font. Code pages 102-110 require the memory expansion option and a downloaded International
TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/ Code Pages” for more information.
If using symbol set 110 (Unicode UTF-8), set the MPCL control characters (start of header, etc.) to decimal values between 0 and
128; otherwise, errors may occur with the Unicode data entered.
See Chapter 2, "Configuring the Printer" for more information about the MPCL control characters.
T,2,10,V,250,80,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p Example
Defines a text field (field #2) with a variable length of up to 10 characters.
The field begins at row 250, column 80. There is no additional gap between characters, and the Standard font is used without any additional magnification. The printing is black on white and centered. No field or character rotation is used. The internal symbol set is used.
D e f i n i n g B a r C o d e F i e l d s
Each bar code field requires a separate definition.
Syntax
B,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column, font,density,height,text,alignment,field rot, type,sep_height,segment p
B1. B
B2. field#
B3. # of char
Bar Code Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify this field.
Maximum number of characters. If the bar code uses a check digit, allow an extra character for the check digit. The actual maximum number of characters is limited by the size of the label and bar code density. Range:
0 to 2710.
3-8 Defining Fields
For the GS1 DataBarä bar code, the maximum number of characters varies based on the specific GS1 DataBar type.
Bar Code Type (B13)
1 - GS1 DataBar 14
2 - GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated
Maximum Number of Characters
13 - no check digit input
13 - no check digit input
3 - GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked
4 - GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni directional
5 - GS1 DataBar Limited
6 - GS1 DataBar Expanded
7 - UPCA
8 - UPCE
9 - EAN13
10 - EAN8
11 - UCC/EAN128 and CC A/B
12 - UCC/EAN128 and CC C
13 - no check digit input
13 - no check digit input
13 - no check digit input
*
11 - no check digit input
10 - no check digit input
12 - no check digit input
7 - no check digit input
*
*
* For more information, refer to the GS1 General Specification.
Note: If not enough characters are entered, the bar code pads to the left with zeros. If too many characters are entered, unpredictable results may occur.
If FNC1 (function 1) is supported, use ~029 in the batch data to invoke it.
Quick Response (QR Code) can use 299 to 2710 characters. DataMatrix can use up to 2710 numeric characters or 2335 alphanumeric characters.
See Appendix A, "Samples" for more information.
Data Type
Numeric Data
Alphanumeric data
8-byte data
Kanji data
Model 1
1167
707
486
299
Model 2
2710
2710
2710
1817
Note: The maximum number of characters depends on the selected level of error correction. As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of characters decreases.
Defining Fields 3-9
B4. fix/var Fixed (F) or variable (V) length field.
Bar Code
UPCA
UPCA+2
UPCA+5
UPCA+Price CD
UPCE
UPCE+2
UPCE+5
EAN8
EAN8+2
EAN8+5
EAN13
EAN13+2
EAN13+5
EAN13+Price CD
POSTNET
Interleaved 2 of 5 or Interleaved
I 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar
Code 39 (w/ or w/o CD) or MOD43
Codabar (NW7)
Code 128
Code 16K
Code 93
MSI
PDF 417
Maxicode*
Data Matrix*
Quick Response*
Number of Characters
12
14
17
12
7
9
12
8
10
13
13
15
18
13
9 or 11
0 - 2710
0 - 2710
0 - 2710
0 - 2710
0 - 2710
0 - 2710
0 - 14
0 - 2710
0 to 93 (alphanumeric)
0 to 128 (numeric)
0 to 2335 (alphanumeric)
0 to 2710 (numeric)
1167 - 2710 (numeric)
707 - 2710 (alphanumeric)
F or V
V
V
* For more information about MaxiCode, Data Matrix, and Quick Response, see Appendix A, “Samples.”
Fixed or Variable
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F or V
F or V
F or V
F or V
V
V
F or V
F or V
3-10 Defining Fields
Bar Code
Aztec
GS1 DataBar
B5. row
Number of Characters
0 - 2710
0 - 2710
Fixed or Variable
F or V
F or V
Distance from bottom of the print area to the pivot point of the field. The pivot point varies, depending on how the field is justified. Pivot points:
Left/Center/Right-Justified Fields
Balanced Fields End-Justified Fields
Remember to include text or numbers that may appear with the bar code for the row measurement.
B6. column
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
Defining Fields 3-11
B7. font
B8. density
Distance from the lower left edge of the print area to the pivot point. Use the previous table for values.
Allow a minimum of 1/10 inch between the scan edge of bar code and label edges or other data.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum of 1.3
inches (33 mm) between the bar code and the top of the label. See “Determining the Print Area” in
Chapter 1 for more information.
35
36
37
38
23
31
32
33
40
41
44
50
15
16
17
22
11
12
13
14
Bar code. Options:
1 UPCA
2
3
UPCE
Interleaved 2 of 5
6
7
4
5
Code 39 (no check digit)
Codabar
EAN8
EAN13
8
9
10
Code 128
MSI
UPCA +2
UPCA +5
UPCE +2
UPCE +5
EAN8 +2
EAN8 +5
EAN13 +2
EAN13 +5
POSTNET
Code 93
Code 16K
PDF417
MaxiCode
Data Matrix (ECC-200)
Quick Response
Aztec
GS1 DataBar
Code 39 (MOD 43 check digit)
UPCA & Price CD
EAN13 & Price CD
Interleaved 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar
Bar code density. Use the following table for other bar codes.
3-12 Defining Fields
2 0 3 D P I B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
Bar Code
Type
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
UPCA +2/+5
Price CD
UPCE
+2/+5
EAN8
+2/+5
EAN13+2/+5
Price CD
Interleaved
2 of 5 or I2of5 with Barrier
Bar 4
5
6
2
4
1
2
3
2
4
2
4
2
4
76%
114%
76%
114%
76%
114%
76%
114%
1.1
2.1
3.2
4.2
5.6
6.3
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
2/9.9
3/14.8
2/9.9
3/14.8
2/9.9
3/14.8
2/9.9
3/14.8
21/103.4
12/59.1
7/34.5
6/29.6
4/19.7
4/19.7
(Code 39 or
MOD43
(Extended
Code 39)
Codabar
(NW7)
Code 128 or
Code 16K
7.5
8.8
9.6
11.2
11.0
12.7
14.5
1.4
1.7
3.5
4.2
6.3
7.0
3.9
12.7
3.0
2.1
3.0
4.6
5.1
8.4
9.2
10.1
3.5/7.0
4.4/8.7
5.8/11.7
8.7/11.5
7
8
9
10
11
12
4
5
2
3
7
8
9
4
6
8
20
13
6
7
11
12
20
3
4
1
2
3/14.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
8/39.4
6/29.6
4/19.7
4/19.7
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
5/24.6
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
10/49.3
8/39.4
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
4/19.7
1/4.9
5/24.6
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
N/A
1:2.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.2
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char
Set
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9 11 or 12
14/17
6 or 7
9/12
7 or 8
10/13
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
12 or 13
15/18
1, 5, 6,7 or 8
0 to 2710 8
0 to 9
0 to 9 1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
0 to 2710
0 to 26
0 to 2710
8
8
8
SPACE
$%*+-./
0 to 9
A to Z
$+-./
0 to 9 a to d
00H to 7FH
Note: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for
Code 39. Code 39, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only.
Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar codes.
Defining Fields 3-13
Bar Code
Type
CODE 93 3
4
5
7
10
MSI 4
5
7
Density
Selector
3.7
4.5
5.6
7.5
11.2
4.2
5.6
7.2
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
N/A
Data
Length
0 to 2710 8
Appearance
Codes
Available
6/29.6
5/24.6
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
1:2.0
1:2.0
1:2.5
0 to 14 8
Char Set
00H to
7FH
0 to 9
POSTNET 0 (fixed at
4.3 cpi)
MaxiCode 7
24/118.2
N/A
10/49.3
N/A
4/19.7 (5 dot gap)
N/A
0,5,6,9 or
11
99
8
8
0 to 9
00H to
FFH
Bar Code
Type
PDF417
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
Density
Selector
Element
Width
(dot/mils)
2/9.8
2/9.8
2/9.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
4/19.7
4/19.7
4/19.7
Row Height
(dots/mils)
2/9.8
4/19.7
6/29.6
3/14.8
6/29.6
9/44.3
4/19.7
8/39.4
12/59.1
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
Aspect
Ratio
Data
Length
0 to 2709 8
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
00H to
FFH
Bar Code Type
Quick Response
(QR Code) Models 1 and 2
Density
Selector
0
Data Length
Model 1: 0 - 1167 Numeric;0 - 707 Alphanumeric;
0 - 486 (8-bit); 0 - 299 (Kanji)
Model 2: 0 - 2710 Numeric, Alphanumeric and 8-bit;
0 - 1817 Kanji
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
3-14 Defining Fields
2 0 3 D P I B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
Bar Code
Data Matrix
Square symbols
Size
Row x Col.
10 x 10
12 x 12
14 x 14
16 x 16
18 x 18
20 x 20
22 x 22
24 x 24
26 x 26
32 x 32
36 x 36
40 x 40
44 x 44
48 x 48
52 x 52
64 x 64
72 x 72
80 x 80
88 x 88
96 x 96
104 x 104
120 x 120
132 x 132
144 x 144
Density
Selector
Max. Data Length
Num. X Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
6 x 3
10 x 6
16 x 10
24 x 16
36 x 25
44 x 31
60 x 43
72 x 52
88 x 64
124 x 91
172 x 127
228 x 169
288 x 214
348 x 259
408 x 304
560 x 418
736 x 550
912 x 682
1152 x 862
1392 x 1042
1632 x 1222
2100 x 1573
2608 x 1954
2710 x 2335
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Bar Code
Data Matrix
Rectangular symbols
Size
Row x Col.
8 x 18
8 x 32
12 x 26
12 x 36
16 x 36
16 x 48
Density
Selector
Max. Data Length
Num. X Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
25
26
27
28
29
30
10 x 6
20 x 13
32 x 22
44 x 31
64 x 46
98 x 72
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Note: The printers support printing a Data Matrix symbol with an
X-dimension of 13 mils or greater (3 dots @203 dpi). If you use a denser bar code, make sure the bar code scans in your particular application. Our “premium” supplies and increasing the print contrast are recommended for denser bar codes. Depending on your application, additional densities are available.
Defining Fields 3-15
2 0 3 D P I B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
Bar Code Type
GS1 DataBar
Aztec
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
4
5
2
3
6
6
7
8
4
5
2
3
Density
Selector
Narrow Element
(dots/mils)
2/9.9
3/14.8
4/19.7
5/24.6
6/29.6
7/34.5
8/39.4
0.0099
0.0148
0.0197
0.0247
0.0296
0.0345
0.0394
0.0444
0.0493
0.0542
0.0592
0.0641
0.069
0.074
Data Length
0 to 2710
0 to 2710
Chart Set
00H to
FFH
00H to
FFH
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
3-16 Defining Fields
3 0 0 D P I B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
Bar Code
Type
UPCA +2/+5
Price CD
UPCE
+2/+5
EAN8
+2/+5
EAN13+2/+5
Price CD
Interleaved
2 of 5 or I2of5 with Barrier
Bar
2
4
2
4
1
2
3
2
4
2
4
7
8
9
4
5
6
(Code 39 or
MOD43
(Extended
Code 39)
Codabar
(NW7)
Code 128 or
Code 16K
10
11
12
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
4
6
8
20
13
3
4
1
2
6
7
11
12
20
Density
Selector
4.2
5.6
6.2
8.3
9.4
9.9
77%
103%
77%
103%
77%
103%
77%
103%%
1.1
2.1
3.3
11.1
11.1
13.0
2.3
3.4
5.0
5.6
9.1
10.4
11.1
4.5
6.8
9.1
3.9
14.3
1.4
1.7
3.4
4.7
6.2
7.1
3.8
11.5
3.1
Density
(% or cpi)
3/10
3/10
3/10
3/10
15/50.0
12/40.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
3/10.0
6/20.0
2/6.7
7/23.4
12/40.0
9/30.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
7/23.4
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
3/10
4/13.3
3/10
4/13.3
3/10
4/13.3
3/10
4/13.3
31/103.4
18/60.1
10/33.4
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
Data
Length
11 or 12
14/17
6 or 7
9/12
7 or 8
10/13
12 or 13
15/18
0 to 2710
9/30.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
4/13.3
4/13.3
1:2.4
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.3
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.2
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
N/A
0 to 2710
0 to 26
0 to 2710
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char
Set
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
8
8
8
8
0 to 9
SPACE
$%*+-./
0 to 9
A to Z
$+-./
0 to 9 a to d
00H to 7FH
Note: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for Code
39. Code 39, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only. Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar codes.
Defining Fields 3-17
Bar Code
Type
CODE 93 3
4
5
7
10
MSI 4
5
7
Density
Selector
3.7
4.8
5.6
8.3
11.1
4.2
6.2
7.5
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
9/30.0
7/23.4
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
N/A
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
0 to 2710 8
Char Set
00H to
7FH
1:2.0
1:2.0
1:2.3
0 to 2710 8 0 to 9
POSTNET 0 (fixed at
4.3 cpi)
MaxiCode 7
24/118.2
N/A
10/49.3
N/A
6/20.0 (5 dot gap)
N/A
0,5,6,9 or
11
99
8
8
0 to 9
00H to
FFH
Bar Code
Type
PDF417
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
Density
Selector
Element
Width
(dot/mils)
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
4/13.33
4/13.3
4/13.3
6/20.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
Row Height
(dots/mils)
3/10.0
6/20.0
9/30.0
4/13.3
9/30.0
12/40.0
6/20.0
12/40.0
18/60.0
Aspect
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
0 to 2709 8
Char Set
00H to
FFH
Bar Code
Type
Quick Response
(QR Code) Models 1 and 2
Density
Selector
0
Data Length
Model 1: 0-1167 Numeric; 0-707 Alphanumeric;
0-486 (8-Bit); 0-299 Kanji
Model 2: 0-2710 Numeric; Alphanumeric and 8-Bit;
0-1817 Kanji
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
3-18 Defining Fields
3 0 0 D P I B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
Bar Code
Data Matrix
Square symbols
Size
Row x Col.
10 x 10
12 x 12
14 x 14
16 x 16
18 x 18
20 x 20
22 x 22
24 x 24
26 x 26
32 x 32
36 x 36
40 x 40
44 x 44
48 x 48
52 x 52
64 x 64
72 x 72
80 x 80
88 x 88
96 x 96
104 x 104
120 x 120
132 x 132
144 x 144
Density
Selector
Max. Data Length
Num. X Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
6 x 3
10 x 6
16 x 10
24 x 16
36 x 25
44 x 31
60 x 43
72 x 52
88 x 64
124 x 91
172 x 127
228 x 169
288 x 214
348 x 259
408 x 304
560 x 418
736 x 550
912 x 682
1152 x 862
1392 x 1042
1632 x 1222
2100 x 1573
2608 x 1954
2710 x 2335
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Bar Code
Data Matrix
Rectangular symbols
Size
Row x Col.
8 x 18
8 x 32
12 x 26
12 x 36
16 x 36
16 x 48
Density
Selector
Max. Data Length
Num. X Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
25
26
27
28
29
30
10 x 6
20 x 13
32 x 22
44 x 31
64 x 46
98 x 72
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Note: The printers support printing a Data Matrix symbol with an
X-dimension of 13 mils or greater (3 dots @203 dpi). If you use a denser bar code, make sure the bar code scans in your particular application. Our “premium” supplies and increasing the print contrast are recommended for denser bar codes. Depending on your application, additional densities are available.
Defining Fields 3-19
3 0 0 D P I B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
Bar Code Type
GS1 DataBar
Aztec
B9. height
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
4
5
2
3
6
6
7
8
4
5
2
3
Density
Selector
Narrow Element
(dots/mils)
3/9.8
4/13.1
5/16.4
7/23
8/26.2
10/32.8
11/36.1
0.010
0.0133
0.0167
0.0233
0.0266
0.0333
0.0366
0.0433
0.0466
0.0533
0.0566
0.0633
0.0666
0.0733
Data Length
0 to 2710
0 to 2710
Chart Set
00H to
FFH
00H to
FFH
Note: Values in bold indicate the default.
Bar code height, in 1/100 inches, 1/10 mm, or dots. Minimum values:
English 19
Metric 48
203 Dots 38
300 Dots 57
POSTNET, PDF417, and MaxiCode bar codes have a fixed height.
Always use 0 for these bar codes.
For Data Matrix and QR Code, the printer determines the size of the symbol, but the user’s scanner determines the functional size (minimum height) of the symbol. Small Data Matrix and QR Codes may not be scannable. The Data Matrix and QR Code’s height depends on the number entered for this parameter. For example, if you select 80, the symbol could be smaller than 0.80," but it will not be greater than the amount specified in this parameter. The symbol arranges the data according to rows and columns within the specified height.
For the GS1 DataBar bar code, the height is for the linear bar code only used with UCC/EAN family types listed in B13.
For the Aztec bar code, use 0.
3-20 Defining Fields
B10. text Appearance of text with bar code. For UPC and EAN only use 0 to 7. For all others, use 8, except where noted. Options:
0 Default
MaxiCode Mode 0 (obsolete)
1
2
QR Code Model 2
No check digit or number system
QR Code Model 1
MaxiCode Mode 2 (Numeric Postal Code)
3
5
6
7
8
QR Code Model 2
MaxiCode Mode 3 (Alphanumeric Postal Code)
Number system at bottom, no check digit
Check digit at bottom, no number system
Check digit and number system at bottom
No text, bar code only
MaxiCode (autodetect modes 0, 2, or 3), Data Matrix,
GS1 DataBar, and Aztec.
B11. alignment Choose L, R, C, B or E to align the bar code data correctly in the field. B centers variable width bar codes, which may not allow pad-character centering (Code 128, Code 39, etc.) E right justifies variable width bar codes. MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code, GS1 DataBar, and Aztec must use L.
B12. field rot
B13. type
Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the characters.
Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on how text is justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:
0 Top of field points to top of supply
1
2
3
(Use for Maxicode)
Top of field points to left of supply
Top of field points to bottom of supply
Top of field points to right of supply
Note: Serial bar codes with an 8-dot narrow element do not automatically print at 2.5 IPS. Serial bar codes printed at speeds greater than
2.5 IPS may not scan properly.
Select from the bar code family. This parameter only applies to the GS1
DataBar bar code. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter.
Options:
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
GS1 DataBar 14 (default)
GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated
GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked
GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni directional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
UPCA
UPCE
EAN13
EAN8
UCC/EAN128 and CC A/B
UCC/EAN128 and CC C
Defining Fields 3-21
B14. sep_height Height of the separator between the linear bar code and 2D bar code. This parameter only applies to the GS1 DataBar bar code. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter. The value is 1 or 2. The default is 1.
B15. segment Width of the segment – only for use with GS1 DataBar family types listed in
B13. For other bar codes, do not include this parameter. The range is even numbers from 2 to 22. The default is 22.
Example
B,3,12,V,50,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 p
Defines a bar code field (field #3) with 12 characters of variable length starting at row 150, column 40. A UPCA bar code with a density of 2 and a height of 80 is used. The check digit and number system are shown at the bottom. The bar code is left aligned without any field rotation.
Example
B,1,30,V,5,5,38,4,0,0,L,0,1,2,22¦
Defines a bar code field (field #3) with up to 30 characters of variable length starting at row 5, column 5. The GS1 DataBar uses a density of 4. No text is shown with the bar code. The bar code is left-aligned with no field rotation.
D e f i n i n g N o n - P r i n t a b l e Te x t F i e l d s
Non-printable text fields allow you to enter data without printing it in its entered form. Typically, non-printable fields “hold” data that later combines with other fields to form a merged field. Define non-printable text fields before you define the field where the information prints.
When you copy this field into another field, the maximum number of characters for the final field is 2710. Allow only as many characters as you need, because extra characters use up space. Also, if you are copying into a bar code field, the maximum number of characters in the destination bar code is determined by the bar code specification (UPCA-12, EAN-13, etc.).
You need to apply field options to manipulate the text entered in this field.
For example, you may want to copy data from this field into another field.
See “Option 4 Copy Data” in Chapter 4 for more information.
3-22 Defining Fields
In the following example, data is entered into four non-printable fields and merged to form field 5, and is then printed as a bar code. See “Merging
Fields” in Chapter 4 for more information.
Field Data
1
2
3
4
5
20374
339
8
15
20374339815
Field Type
Non-printable
Non-printable
Non-printable
Non-printable
Bar Code
Each non-printable text field requires a separate definition.
Syntax
D,field#,# of char p
D1. D
D2. field#
D3. # of char
Non-Printable Text Field.
Unique number from 0 to 999 assigned to this field.
Maximum number of characters in this field: 0 to 2710.
Example
D,4,20 p
Defines a non-printable text field (field #4) with a maximum of 20 characters.
D e f i n i n g C o n s t a n t Te x t F i e l d s
A constant text field is a set of fixed characters that prints on all labels.
Define each constant text field separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). The characters in this field cannot be changed by batch data. Field options do not apply to constant text fields.
Mark the pivot point of your field. This will vary, depending on how your field is justified.
Defining Fields 3-23
Syntax
C1. C
C2. row
C,row,column,gap,font,hgt mag, wid mag,color,alignment,char rot, field rot,"fixed char",sym set p
Constant Text Field.
For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to the pivot point. For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to baseline of characters in the field. (Bottom exits the printer first.)
C3. column
C4. gap
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Distance from the lower left edge of the print area to the pivot point. Use the previous table for values.
Number of dots between characters (203 dots per inch). Range: 0 to 99.
Any number other than 0 or the default number affects your field width. Default spacing:
Standard
Reduced
Bold
OCRA-like
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface Bold
CG Triumvirateä Typeface
3 dots
1 dot
3 dots
3 dots varies with each letter varies with each letter
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
3-24 Defining Fields
C5. font
C6. hgt mag
C7. wid mag
C8. color
Style of font. Options:
1 Standard
2
3 Bold
4
5 HR1
6
Reduced
OCRA-like
HR2
10 CG Triumvirateä Typeface Bold
11 CG Triumvirateä Typeface
15 7 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
16 9 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
17 11 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
18 15 pt. CG Triumvirateä Typeface
50 EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType® Scalable)
56 PaxarSymbols (version 5.0 or greater)
Or a valid downloaded font selector number.
Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only.
The CG Triumvirateä typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS Code
Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font does not support Code
Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C for more information.
Height magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally spaced fonts, because characters lose smoothness at higher magnifications. See
Appendix B, “Fonts,” for more information about fonts.
Width magnifier, 1 to 7 times (4 to 255 points for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a set width. To estimate the size of your field, use the letter “W” for the widest field or an
“L” for an average width field. Find your selected font and the desired width in Appendix B, “Fonts.”
There are two types of field color overlay attributes:
Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does not block out
(or “erase”) existing fields.
Opaque The overlay field blocks out (or “erases”) existing fields.
Options for standard printer fonts:
B Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
D/R/W
O
Opaque, Normal, White, Normal
Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Options for scalable fonts:
A/N Opaque, Normal, Black, Bold
B/O
E/S
F/T
Opaque, Normal, Black, Normal
Opaque, Italics, Black, Bold
Opaque, Italics, Black, Normal
Note: Solid black print should not exceed 30% on a given square inch of the label, or the printhead life may be decreased.
Field placement in the packet is an important consideration when using field color attributes. If a line field is defined before the overlay (text or constant text) field, the line field is blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay field’s color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay field, the line field is not blocked out by the overlay field, regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.
Defining Fields 3-25
C9. alignment
C10. char rot
Alignment of constant text in the field. Options:
L Align on left side of field.
C
R
Center text within field (for monospaced fonts only)
Align on right side of field (for monospaced fonts only)
B
E
Align at midpoint of field
Align at end of field.
Use L, B, or E for any font.
Character rotation. The field or supply does not rotate, only the characters do. Options:
0
1
Top of character points to top of field
Top of character points to left of field
2
3
Top of character points to bottom of field
Top of character points to right of field
C11. field rot
Note: Font 50 and downloaded TrueType fonts do not support character rotation.
Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just the characters.
Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies depending on how text is justified. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point. Options:
0 Top of overlay points to top of supply
1
2
3
Top of overlay points to left of supply
Top of overlay points to bottom of supply
Top of overlay points to right of supply
C12. “fixed char” Fixed characters to appear in the field. Maximum 2710 characters.
Enclose in quotation marks.
3-26 Defining Fields
C13. sym set Symbol set. Use 0 for the Internal Symbol Set. For scalable or TrueTypeâ fonts, use:
1 ANSI Symbol Set
100 Macintosh
101 Wingdings
102 Unicode (user input) for particular mapping
103 BIG5 (user input) for Unicode mapping
104 GB2312 (user input) for Unicode mapping
105 SJIS (user input) for Unicode mapping
Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)
106 GB2312 (user input) for GB2312 mapping
Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)
107 BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping
Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)
110 Unicode UTF-8
437 DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)
850 DOS Code Page 850 (International)
852 DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
855 DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
857 DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
860 DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
1250 Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
1251 Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
1252 Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
1253 Code Page 1253 (Greek)
1254 Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
1255 Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
1256 Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
1257 Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
1258 Code Page 1258 (Vietnam)
Note: The Standard, Reduced, Bold, OCRA and HR fonts only support the Internal Symbol Set (0). The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces only support the ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets.
The scalable font (font#50) does not support Code Page 1256
(Arabic). Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 are for downloaded
TrueType fonts or the scalable font. Code pages 102-110 require the memory expansion option and a downloaded International
TrueType font. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font. See Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/ Code Pages” for more information.
If using symbol set 110 (Unicode UTF-8), set the MPCL control characters (start of header, etc.) to decimal values between 0 and
128; otherwise, errors may occur with the Unicode data entered.
See Chapter 2, "Configuring the Printer" for more information about the MPCL control characters.
Defining Fields 3-27
Example
C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MADE IN USA",0 p
Defines a constant text field starting at row 30, column 10. It does not have any additional inter-character gap. The Standard font is used without any additional magnification. The printing is black on white and left justified.
No field or character rotation is used. “MADE IN USA” is printed in this field. The internal symbol set is used.
D e f i n i n g L i n e F i e l d s
Use lines to form borders and mark out original prices. Define each line separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). You can define any line length and a thickness up to 99 dots, as long as the solid black print does not exceed 30 percent of any given square inch of the label.
L i n e Ty p e s
You can create horizontal and vertical lines. There are two ways to define lines.
Segments You choose the starting point and ending point.
Vectors You choose the starting point, the angle, and the length of the line.
Syntax
L1. L
L2. type
L3. row
L,type,row,column,angle/end row,length/ end col,thickness,"pattern" p
Line Field.
Type of line. Only vertical and horizontal lines are supported. Options:
S Segment. You choose the starting point and ending point.
V Vector. You choose the starting point, angle, and ength.
Distance from bottom of print area to the starting point.
l
3-28 Defining Fields
L4. column
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
Distance from left edge of the print area to line origin.
Use the previous table for values.
L5. angle
/end row
If Using Segments:
Row location of ending point. Measure from bottom of print area. Ranges same as row above. On horizontal lines, this value must match item L3.
If Using Vectors:
Angle of line. Options: 0, 90, 180, or 270.
L6. length/ end col
If Using Segments:
Column location of end point. Measure from left edge of print area. Ranges same as column above. On vertical lines, this value must match parameter L4.
If Using Vectors:
Length of the line in selected units. Use the previous table for values.
Defining Fields 3-29
L7. thickness Using the chart below for reference, write the line thickness
(1 to 99) in box L7. Line thickness fills upward on horizontal lines, or to the right on vertical lines. Measured in dots.
L8. “pattern”
Example
Line pattern. Enter "".
L,S,110,30,110,150,10,"" p
Defines a horizontal line field as a segment starting at row 110, column 30 and ending at row 110, column 150. The line thickness is 10 dots.
D e f i n i n g B o x F i e l d s
Use boxes to form borders or highlight items of interest. Define each box field separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields per format). You can define any line length and a thickness up to 99 dots, as long as the solid black print does not exceed 30 percent of any given square inch of the label.
3-30 Defining Fields
Syntax
Q1. Q
Q2. row
Q,row,column,end row,end col,thickness,"pattern" p
Box (Quadrilateral) Field.
Distance from bottom of print area to lower left corner of box.
Q3. column
Printer Unit of
Measure
Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Distance from left edge of print area to lower left corner of box. Use the previous table for values.
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
Q4. end row Distance from bottom of print area to upper right corner of box. Ranges same as row.
Q5. end col Distance from left edge of print area to upper right corner of box. Ranges same as column.
Defining Fields 3-31
Q6. thickness Using the chart below for reference, write the desired line thickness
(1 to 99) in box Q6. Boxes fill inward, so make sure your boxes do not overwrite other fields. Measured in dots.
Q7. “pattern”
Example
Line pattern. Enter "".
Q,240,30,270,150,3,"" p
Defines a box field starting at row 240, column 30. It ends at row 270, column 150. It has a thickness of 3 dots.
3-32 Defining Fields
D e f i n i n g Ve r i f i e r F i e l d s
The verifier field in a format references the verifier configuration packet ID to use for this particular format. The verifier field allows you to specify a different verifier configuration packet for each format, regardless of the format number. See “Defining a Verifier Configuration Packet,” in Chapter 2 for more information.
The verifier field allows you to specify a different verifier configuration packet for each of your formats.
If you do not specify a particular verifier configuration packet, the last sent verifier configuration packet is used.
Syntax
V,vfrID p
V1. V
V2. vfrID
Example
Verifier Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the verifier configuration packet to use with this format.
F,25,A,R,M,508,508,"FMT-25" p
V,3 p
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 p
Specifies verifier configuration packet #3 starting with format 25 until another verifier configuration packet is specified.
Defining Fields 3-33
D e f i n i n g t h e R F I D D a t a F i e l d
The RFID Data Field contains the information you want programmed into the
RFID tag. The syntax of the RFID Data Field is similar to the standard non-printable text field format. RFID is only supported on the 9855
printer. Printing over the RFID tag (or transponder) causes printing irregularity. For more information about RFID, refer to the Multi-Protocol
Application Notes, available on our Web site.
¨ With version 2.8 or greater firmware, the printer supports both 64-bit and
96-bit RFID tags.
¨ With version 3.2 or greater firmware, the printer supports multi-protocol encoding, including Class 1 Generation (Gen) 1 and Class 1 Generation
(Gen) 2 supplies.
¨ With version 5.0 or greater firmware, the printer accepts EPC data following the guidelines in the EPCglobalä Tag Data Standards, which conforms to the EPCä Radio Frequency Identity Protocols Class 1
Generation 2 UHF RFID Protocol for Communications at 860-960MHz
Standards (Air Interface Protocol). See “Using Expanded Gen2 Data” in
Chapter 6, “Printing,” for more information.
Syntax
X1. X
X2. field#
X3. # of char
X,field#,# of char,data_type p
RFID Data Field.
Unique number from 0 to 999 assigned to this field.
This number must be equal to or greater than the total number of characters in the RFID Data Field. Range: 0 to 2710. The amount varies according to your RFID data and protocol. For example, C1Gen2 can be
96-Bits, plus the access password, lock code, etc.
Note: An error 715 occurs if the printer does not receive the correct amount of data.
You can pad data to make sure you have the correct amount of bits. See “Option 30,” in Chapter 4 for more information.
3-34 Defining Fields
X4. data_type Data type. Options:
0 ASCII Hex - default (ASCII representation of Hex)
1
2
Use characters A to F and 0 to 9.
ASCII
ASCII Binary (ASCII representation of Binary)
Use characters 0 and 1.
3 Hex
We recommend using ASCII Hex for compatibility with multiple host applications.
For example, the letter A has a decimal value of 65 in the ASCII table. The hex (base 16) equivalent of decimal (base 10) is 41. Hex 41 in binary notation is 01000001.
Data Type Character
ASCII Hex
ASCII
41
A
ASCII Binary 01000001
Hex ~065
MPCL Batch Data for a 96-bit RFID tag
“414141414141414141414141"
“AAAAAAAAAAAA”
“010000010100000101000001010000010100000101000001
010000010100000101000001010000010100000101000001"
“~065~065~065~065~065~065~065~065~065~065~065~065"
Example
X,5,24,0 p
Defines an RFID Data Field (field #5) with exactly 24 ASCII Hex characters for a 96-bit RFID tag.
Defining Fields 3-35
3-36 Defining Fields
D E F I N I N G F I E L D O P T I O N S
This chapter provides a reference for defining
¨
¨ field options in formats check digit packets.
4
Note: When using multiple options on the printer, options are processed in the order they are received.
Defining Field Options 4-1
A p p l y i n g F i e l d O p t i o n s
Field options further define text, bar code, and non-printable text fields.
The text, constant text, or bar code field must be previously defined before you can apply any field option to it. Define options immediately after the field to which they apply.
C o m b i n i n g F i e l d O p t i o n s
You can use more than one option with most fields. For example, you can use Option 4 to copy data from another field, and then use Option 30 to pad the field. When you use multiple options for the same field, you must place the options in the order you want to apply them to your format.
R e s t r i c t i o n s
Some options cannot be used together. For example, incrementing (Option
60) and price field (Option 42) options cannot be applied to the same field.
Refer to the following sections addressing individual options for specific combinations to avoid.
Option 4 (copy a field) is the only option that can be repeated for a single field.
Example
R,1,3,1,3,1,1 p
Syntax
R1. R
R2. option#
R,option#,parameter...parameter
p
Indicates field option header.
Option number:
1 Define fixed characters
2
3
Data type restrictions (9855/9860)
Data entry template (9855/9860)
4
5
6
20
Copy data from previous field
Define data entry sources (9855/9860)
Upload field data
Define data entry prompts (9855/9860)
21
30
31
Define extended field names (9855 XML-enabled printer)
Pad data to left or right with specified character
Generate check digit
4-2 Defining Field Options
53
60
61
62
64
42
50
51
52
Format as a price field
Define bar code densities
Define security and truncation of PDF417 bar codes
Define width or length of PDF417 bar codes
Define optional settings for Aztec bar codes
Define incrementing or decrementing field
Reimage fields
Do not scan/verify a particular bar code
Program the AFI Field for UHF RFID tags
R3. parameter(s) Varies per option. See the following option descriptions.
A p p l y i n g O p t i o n s t o t h e R F I D D a t a F i e l d
All the normal field options (copy, merge, pad, increment, etc.) can be applied to the RFID Data Field. However, certain restrictions may apply.
¨ To copy, merge, pad, or increment data in the RFID Data Field, the copied/merged/padded/incremented data must be in the same format specified in the RFID Data Field. For example, to copy data into the
RFID Data Field using ASCII Hex, the field being copied must be in
ASCII Hex format; otherwise, unexpected results may occur.
¨ When incrementing the RFID Data Field, see the following table for an explanation of how the field increments.
Data Type
ASCII Hex
ASCII Binary
ASCII or Hex
How the Field Increments
0 to F (0123456789ABCDEF), then back to 0
0 to 1 or 1 to 0 next position in 0 to 255 range
¨ If Option 60 (Increment Field) contains the character “D” to decrement, it is ignored and the field is instead incremented by one.
¨ When incrementing the RFID Data Field, the only valid value to increment is by one.
¨ Use caution when incrementing an RFID field if data is coming directly from your host because the field must be incremented in ASCII Hex (or other specified data type).
Defining Field Options 4-3
O p t i o n 1 ( F i x e d D a t a )
Fixed data is information (a company name or store number) you want to print on all labels. You can define fixed characters for an entire field or for part of a field.
Syntax R,1,"fixed char" p
R1. R
R2. 1
R3. fixed char
Example
Option Header.
Option 1.
Characters to insert. Enclose in quotation marks. If you are defining fixed characters for part of a field, place underscores(_) in non-fixed positions.
Any spaces in the phrase are fixed characters. Range: 0 to 2710.
Note: Underscore characters are stripped out and the data is compressed if no data is supplied by the batch and the field length is variable.
R,1,"_ _ _%$_ _ _ _ _" p
Uses fixed characters (%$) in positions 4 and 5. The other positions are variable.
Example
R,1,"MONARCH" p
“MONARCH” appears as a fixed field in this example.
To fill in the non-fixed portion of the field, see “Defining Batch Data Fields” in Chapter 6. As an alternative, you can apply Option 4 to copy data into the non-fixed character positions.
4-4 Defining Field Options
O p t i o n 2 ( D a t a Ty p e R e s t r i c t i o n s )
This option restricts the data type for a particular field. You can use Options
2 or 3 only once per field. Do not use with Option 3 (Data Entry Templates).
Note: Option 2 is only available on the 9855 and 9860 printers. You must use the Monarch® 939ä keyboard for offline data entry.
If you do batch entry only in the batch packet, you do not need to apply
Options 2 and 3. Use these options only for offline batch entry.
Syntax
R,2,char_code p
R1. R
R2. 2
R3. char code
Example
Option Header.
Option 2.
Character type for the field. Options:
1 Numeric only (0..9)
2
3
Letters only (A..Z,a..z)
Symbols only (printable characters other than letters
4
5
6 or numbers)
Letters and numbers only
Numbers and symbols only
Letters and symbols only
Spaces are permitted in all categories. You can also use a combination of any two (letter, numbers, or symbols) character types.
Note: A use for this option is a quantity field, where the operator could enter only numeric data.
R,2,2 p
Restricts the field data to letters only (A-Z or a-z).
Defining Field Options 4-5
O p t i o n 3 ( D a t a E n t r y Te m p l a t e s )
This option provides more specific restrictions than Option 2. This option can be used to select certain letters (such as A through F or the numbers 1 through 4) from a character set. You can also use this option to create a template of allowable characters for a field. Do not use with Option 2 (Data
Type Restrictions).
Use this option only for offline batch entry. You can define a template up to
30 characters long, but the printer only displays 16 characters at a time.
The character template must contain the same number of characters as the field.
Note: Option 3 is only available on the 9855 and 9860 printers. You must use the 939 keyboard for offline data entry.
Syntax
R1. R
R2. 3
R3. code
R4. chars
R,3,code,chars p
Option Header.
Option 3.
Data types. Options
S Defines a specific set of characters for the entire field. The string length does not have to match the field length. Maximum is 30 characters.
T Creates a template of allowable data types by placing character indicators in each character position. The number of characters in the string must match the length of the field.
Note: A sample use for this option is a field on a patient record containing blood type. Acceptable characters would be A, B, O, +, or -.
Characters to include in a field or a specific template. Must be enclosed within quotation marks. Indicators can be
*
# any printable character any digit 0-9
-
@ any letter a-z, A-Z no user input for this position (for fixed data or copied data)
4-6 Defining Field Options
Example
R,3,S,"ABC1234567890" p
Restricts the field data to letters A, B, and C, and all digits.
Example
R,3,T,"***#_ _ _ _"
p
Creates a template that allows any printable character in positions 1, 2, and
3; digits in position 4; and reserves positions 5 through 8 for fixed or copied data.
Example R,3,T,"####_ _ _ _" p
Creates a template that allows digits only in positions 1-4, and reserves positions 5 through 8 for fixed or copied data.
O p t i o n 4 ( C o p y D a t a )
You can create a field that uses data from another field. This is useful for creating merged fields or sub-fields. You can copy the information from multiple fields into one field by applying the copy procedure more than once.
Copy data is the only option you can apply to a field more than once.
The maximum number of characters defined in box T3 or B3 must allow for the number of characters you will place in the field, including any price, check digit, or fixed characters inserted by the printer. The maximum number of characters in the field into which data is copied cannot exceed
2710 or the maximum number of characters permitted by the bar code.
Note: When copying from more than one field, copy into the destination field from left to right.
Defining Field Options 4-7
Syntax
R1. R
R2. 4
R3. src fld
R4. src start
R5. # to copy
R6. dest start
R7. copy code
Example
R,4,src fld,src start,# to copy,dest start, copy code p
Field Option Header.
Option 4.
Field number from which data is copied. Range: 0 to 999.
Position number in the source field of the first character to be copied.
Character positions are numbered 1 to 2710, starting from the left.
Number of characters to copy. Range: 1 to 2710.
Position number where copied characters are to begin printing in the destination field. Range: 1 to 2710.
Copy Method.
1 Copy field as is (including price symbols, pad characters, check digits, etc.).
2 Copy unformatted data (without price characters, pad characters, etc.).
R,4,3,1,3,1,1 p
Copies data from field #3, starting at the first position and copying three characters. In the destination field, the information is placed in position 1 and copied as formatted data.
Example
R {F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"ASCIIHEX" p
X,2,24,0 p
T,1,50,V,10,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
R,4,2,1,16,1,2 p }
{B,2,N,2 p
1,"313233343536373831323334" p
2,"313233343536373831323334" p }
This example uses Option 4 to copy data from the RFID Data Field and displays the data in text field 1. Note the data type being used is ASCII
Hex, so the data in the RFID Data Field is in ASCII Hex format. This example uses a 96-bit RFID tag.
4-8 Defining Field Options
M e r g i n g F i e l d s
You can copy data to merge the contents of fields. Use the copy data option as many times as necessary to copy all the appropriate fields into the merged field.
In the following example, two text and two non-printable fields are shown.
Data from these fields is merged to form field 5, and is then printed as a bar code.
Field Data Field Type
1
2
3
4
5
203
339
8
BLUE
Non-printable
Non-printable
Text
Text
2033398BLUE Bar Code
To create this sequence:
1.
Define fields 1, 2, 3, and 4.
2.
Define field 5 as a bar code. Allow enough characters in the bar code field to hold all the copied characters.
3.
Apply Option 4 to field 5 once for every source field.
S u b - F i e l d s
You can copy a segment of data from one field into a new location, called a sub-field. For example, extract part of the data in a bar code and display it in text form in a sub-field. Then, use the copy data option.
Defining Field Options 4-9
O p t i o n 5 ( D e f i n e D a t a E n t r y S o u r c e s )
Defines how data is entered into a field. Option 5 is required for offline data entry. If the field holds all fixed characters or copied data only, you can eliminate the operator prompt. Use Option 5 only once per field. You must use the 939 keyboard for offline data entry.
Use this option to read pre-programmed data in the RFID chip embedded within the supply. Using Option 5 stops the printer while reading each label; regardless of the print speed. If using a batch quantity greater than one, the data is read from each label.
Note: Using Option 5 to read pre-programmed RFID data is supported with the release of version 5.0 or greater printer’s software.
The EM4122 protocol requires Option 5 to read the pre-programmed data.
When reading data, make sure the maximum number of characters in the field is equal to or greater than the number of characters being read. If not, the data may be incomplete.
Use option 6 (Upload Field Data) with Option 5 to upload the data from the
RFID chip to a host.
Syntax
R,5,code p
R1. R
R2. 5
R3. code
Option Header.
Option 5.
Input code for the data in the field. Options:
H Host
K
N
R
Keypad
No user input for this field
RFID (read data from the RFID chip) This is ignored on non-RFID printers.
Note: Option 5 re-images each label in the batch.
Example
R,5,K p
Allows data to be entered from the keypad.
Example R,5,N p
Eliminates the user prompt for this field. Data is either fixed or copied from another source.
4-10 Defining Field Options
Example
T,2,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,5,R p
Reads the pre-programmed data from the RFID chip and saves that data into the text field.
O p t i o n 6 ( U p l o a d F i e l d D a t a )
You can upload data from any field using Option 6. When uploading multiple fields of data, the data is comma separated.
Data is uploaded to the last port that received host data (serial, parallel,
USB, or Ethernet) at the end of the batch or label, depending on the other options used as follows:
¨ When using a batch quantity of one without Option 5 or Option 60, data is uploaded at the end of the batch.
¨ When using a batch quantity greater than one with an Option 5 and/or
Option 60, data is uploaded after each label.
Note: To upload data on a field that did not change, apply Option 60 to that field.
Syntax
R1. R
R2. 6
R3. device
Example
R,6,device p
Option Header.
Option 6.
Last port that received host data. Use H (host).
T,2,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,6,H p
Uploads the text field’s data to a file.
Defining Field Options 4-11
Example
B,3,12,F,50,50,1,2,60,7,L,0 p
R,6,H p
R,60,I,0 p
Uploads the UPCA bar code field’s data to a file and uploads data for each label in the batch.
Example
T,150,V,230,130,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
R,5,R
p
R,6,H p
Reads the RFID data from the RFID chip embedded in the supply. Uploads the data to the last-used port.
Example
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI"
p
X,5,24,0 p
T,6,20,V,415,270,0,50,15,15,B,L,0,2 p
R,4,5,1,16,1,0 p
R,6,H p }
Copies data from field 5 (RFID Data Field) to field 6 (Text field). Uploads the data to the last-used port
S a m p l e U p l o a d P a c k e t
Example
R,5,R p
R,6,H p
Returns the following in the upload packet:
313233343536373839303132
Example
B,3,12,F,50,50,1,2,60,7,L,0
p
R,6,H p
Returns the following in the upload packet:
123456789012
4-12 Defining Field Options
Example
R,5,R p
R,6,H p
B,3,12,F,50,50,1,2,60,7,L,0 p
R,6,H p
Returns the following in the upload packet:
313233343536373839303132,123456789012
O p t i o n 2 0 ( D e f i n e D a t a E n t r y P r o m p t s )
This option defines the operator prompt and it is not recommended on fields filled entirely by fixed characters or copied data. This option must be defined before Option 5, or the prompt does not display during data entry.
You must use the 939 keyboard for offline data entry.
Note: Option 20 is only available on the 9855 and 9860 printers.
Syntax
R1. R
R2. 6
R3. device
Example
R,20,"prompt" p
Option Header.
Option 20.
Displays the exact phrase you want to prompt the operator. Must be enclosed within quotations. The prompt must be 15 characters or less.
R,20,"Order Number"
p
Displays the prompt "Order Number" for the operator when this field is imaged.
Defining Field Options 4-13
O p t i o n 2 1 ( D e f i n e E x t e n d e d F i e l d N a m e s )
This option defines names for each field in a format, which can be longer than eight characters. This option is only available on the 9855
XML-enabled printer.
Syntax R,21,"field_name" p
R1. R
R2. 21
Option Header.
Option 21.
R3. “field_name” Specifies the field name. Must be enclosed within quotations. The name can be 1 to 256 characters, excluding non-printable control characters and the quotation mark (“). This name must match the one specified in the variable name attribute.
Example
T,2,10,v,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0
p
R,21,"SALEPRICE_FIELD" p
Defines the name for text field 2 as “SALEPRICE_FIELD.”
O p t i o n 3 0 ( P a d D a t a )
You can add characters to one side of a field to “pad” the field. Padding allows you to fill in the remaining spaces when the entered data does not fill an entire field. If a variable length field is not completely filled with batch data, this option fills the remaining positions in the field with the character designated by Option 30.
Syntax
R,30,L/R,"character" p
R1. R
R2. 30
Option Header.
Option 30.
R3. L/R Indicates type of padding:
L Pad field on left side
R Pad field on right side
R4. “character” Pad character must be within the 0 to 255 decimal range and enclosed inside quotation marks. The pad character must be in the same format specified in the RFID Data Field. See “Defining the RFID Data Field” for more information. Do not use on fixed length fields.
4-14 Defining Field Options
Example
R,30,L,"X" p
Pads data with an “X” on the left side of the field.
Example
X,2,24,0
p
R,30,R,"0" p
Pads the data in the RFID Data Field with a “0" on the right side.
S a m p l e U s e f o r P a d d i n g
If you have a variable length bar code that you want to occupy a fixed amount of space on the supply, use pad characters. If the maximum number of characters in the bar code is 15, but the batch record only has 10 characters, the padding option fills the remainder of the field with pad characters.
O p t i o n 3 1 ( C a l c u l a t e C h e c k D i g i t )
The printer generates a check digit if you apply Option 31 to the field. You cannot use this option if the field contains a UPC, EAN, or Code 39 (with the
MOD43 check digit) bar code.
Syntax
R,31,gen/ver,check digit #
p
R1. R
R2. 31
R3. gen/ver
Option Header.
Option 31.
Enter G to generate a check digit.
R4. check digit # Specifies a check digit scheme. Enter a number that identifies a check digit scheme that has been defined. For more information, see “Using
Check Digits.” Range: 1 to 10.
Example
R,31,G,5 p
Generates a check digit using the previously defined check digit scheme 5.
Defining Field Options 4-15
O p t i o n 4 2 ( P r i c e F i e l d )
You can apply options that will insert monetary symbols automatically. Do not use this option with Option 31 (define a check digit) or Option 60
(increment or decrement a field). This option is not recommended for bar codes. When determining the maximum number of characters, add the maximum number of digits and the monetary symbols.
Syntax
R,42,appearance code p
R1. R
R2. 42
R3. appearance
code
Option Header.
Option 42.
Enter 1 to print price field in standard notation, as defined by country setting.
Use the monetary formatting packet to select monetary notations and symbols by country setting. See “Defining the Monetary Formatting
Packet” for more information.
See Appendix C, “Symbol Sets/Code Pages,” to make sure the monetary symbol you want to use is printable in the font selected for this field. For monetary symbols other than the dollar sign, use the internal symbol set.
Example
R,42,1 p
Uses a price field that prints the monetary symbol and notations as defined in the monetary formatting packet.
4-16 Defining Field Options
O p t i o n 5 0 ( B a r C o d e D e n s i t y )
You can apply this option to bar code fields when you want to create custom densities. When you apply this option, it overrides the density value in the bar code field. When using this option, set the density parameter in your bar code field to the default value. You can only use this option once for each bar code field.
Bar codes produced using Option 50 may not be scannable. Code 39, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only. Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar codes.
The additional character gap, narrow space, and wide space parameters are valid only with Code 39 and Codabar. If these parameters are specified for any other bar codes, they will be ignored by the printer. Do not use Option
50 with fixed density bar codes.
Option 50 can be used with PDF417 bar codes for specific customer ratios.
With PDF417 bar codes, use only the narrow and wide parameters. The narrow parameter defines the individual bar width in dots and the wide parameter is used to define the height of each individual stacked bar code.
Option 50 can also be used with Option 52 to further customize the dimensions of a PDF417 bar code. Option 52 allows customization of the number of columns or number of rows for the bar code.
Syntax R,50,narrow,wide,gap,nar_space,wide_space p
R1. R
R2. 50
R3. narrow
R4. wide
R5. gap
Field Option Header.
Option 50.
Dot width of the narrow element. Range: 1 to 99.
Dot width of the wide element. Range: 1 to 99.
Additional dot space between characters. Enter a value of 1 to 99.
(Code 39 and Codabar only.)
Defining Field Options 4-17
R6. nar_space Additional dot width of the narrow bar code space.
(Code 39 and Codabar only). Range: 1 to 99.
R7. wide_space Additional dot width of the wide bar code space.
(Code 39 and Codabar only). Range: 1 to 99.
Example
R,50,4,8,4,4,8 p
Creates a custom bar code density with a narrow element of 4 dots, a wide element of 8 dots, a gap of 4 dots, 4 additional dot widths for the narrow bar code space, and 8 additonal dot widths for the wide bar code space (if this is a Code 39 or Codabar bar code).
Example
B,1,40,V,100,100,32,1,0,8,L,0 p
R,50,2,10 p
Creates a custom PDF417 bar code density for 203 dpi printers. The narrow element width is 2 dots and the height is 10 dots.
Example
B,1,40,V,100,100,32,1,0,8,L,0 p
50,3,15 p
Creates a custom PDF417 bar code density for 300 dpi printers. The narrow element width is 3 dots and the height is 15 dots.
4-18 Defining Field Options
O p t i o n 5 1 ( P D F 4 1 7 S e c u r i t y / Tr u n c a t i o n )
You can define a security level and choose whether or not to truncate a
PDF417 bar code. Higher security levels add data to a bar code, improving scan reliability. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the security level is high enough. You can use this option to create standard
PDF417 bar codes or use the truncated option to create a narrower bar code. This option can appear only once per PDF417 field, in any order, following the bar code field.
As the security level is increased, so is the size of your PDF417 bar code.
For each level increased, the bar code will double in size.
Syntax
R,51,security,stand/default p
R1. R
R2. 51
R3. security
R4. stand/def
Example
Option Header.
Indicates Option 51.
Security level ranges from 0 to 8 (0 is the default).
Higher security levels add data to a bar code, improving scan reliability.
Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the security level is high enough.
Truncation selector. Valid values:
S (default) a standard PDF417 bar code
T truncated
R,51,2,S p
Defines a security level of 2 for a standard PDF417 bar code.
Defining Field Options 4-19
O p t i o n 5 2 ( P D F 4 1 7 W i d t h / L e n g t h )
This option defines the image width or length of a PDF417 bar code. If you define a fixed number of columns (width), the bar code expands in length. If you define a fixed number of rows (length), the bar code expands in width.
Column value does not include start/stop or left/right indicator columns.
If this option does not immediately follow the PDF417 bar code field, the default settings are used. You can only use this option once per PDF417 bar code field.
Syntax
R,52,row/column,dimension
p
R1. R
R2. 52
Option Header.
Indicates Option 52.
R3. row/column Indicates if you are defining the number of rows or columns.
R Row
C Column
R4. dimension
If you specify rows, the bar code expands in columns, or vice versa.
The number of rows or columns defined for the bar code.
The default is 4. Valid values:
3-90 for rows
1-30 for columns
Example R,52,C,10 p
Defines the column width of 10, which expands the PDF417 bar code length by 10.
4-20 Defining Field Options
O p t i o n 5 3 ( O p t i o n a l S e t t i n g s f o r A z t e c )
You can use Option 53 to set the error control level, enable ECI data, enable a menu symbol, and add appended data to an Aztec bar code.
Note: Typically, these settings are not used. When using Option 53, the printer may take longer to image the bar code and require more time to print the format.
Syntax
R,53,error_ctrl,ECI,menu_sym,str_append,"string"¦
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 53
R3. error_ctrl
Option 53.
Error control level. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the error control level is high enough. Options:
0
1-99
Default level
101-104
201-232
300
R4. ECI Sets the ECI Data flag. The default is 0. Options:
0 Disable
1 Enable
R5. menu_sym Sets the Menu Symbol flag. The default is 0. Options:
0 Disable
1 Enable
R6. str_append Structured append information. Range: 1-26. The default is 1.
R7. “string” String to append. Range: 0-24. The default is “”. Must be enclosed in quotation marks.
Example
R,53,0,0,0,1,""¦
Uses option 53 to set the error control to 0, disables the ECI data and menu symbol flags, and does not append any data to the bar code.
Defining Field Options 4-21
O p t i o n 6 0 ( I n c r e m e n t i n g / D e c r e m e n t i n g F i e l d s )
You may have an application, such as serial numbers, in which you need a numeric field to increment (increase in value) or decrement (decrease in value) on successive tickets within a single batch. Incrementing or decrementing can be applied to numeric data only. If you have a field that includes letters and digits, apply incrementing or decrementing to only the portion of the field that contains digits. Do not use with Option 42 (price field).
Syntax
R,60,I/D,amount,l pos,r pos p
R1. R
R2. 60
R3. I/D
R4. amount
R5. l pos
R6. r pos
Option Header.
Option 60.
Increment or decrement:
I incrementing field
D decrementing field
Amount to increase or decrease. Range: 0 to 999.
Leftmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not entered, the default value 1 is used. Range: 0 to 2710.
Rightmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not used, the entire field length is used as the default. Range: 0 to 2710.
Example
R,60,I,5,1,6 p
Increments a field by 5 each time the field is printed. The field increments beginning with the first left position and ending with the sixth position.
F i x i n g t h e F i r s t N u m b e r i n t h e I n c r e m e n t i n g S e q u e n c e
There are two ways to enter the first number in the incrementing sequence.
You can use batch data or use Option 1 to define the first number as a fixed character. The first number in the sequence must contain the same amount of digits as the highest number to be counted. For example, to count the numbers 1 to 999, the first number in the sequence must be entered as 001.
4-22 Defining Field Options
O p t i o n 6 1 ( R e - i m a g e F i e l d )
This option redraws (reimages) a constant field when you have a constant field next to a variable field on your label. It can be used on text, constant text, bar code, line, or box fields.
These printers do not redraw an area if the field data does not change.
When a field changes, that area is cleared and the new field data is imaged.
However, the new field data may require a larger area than the previous field did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change (constant fields) may be covered with white space from the changing field’s (variable fields) area. Use this option to reimage the constant field, or it may appear broken.
Note: The most common use for this option is with incrementing fields on your label, because they may cover a constant field.
Syntax
R1. R
R2. 61
Example
R,61 p
Option Header.
Option 61.
R,61
Reimages the constant field that appears next to a variable field.
Re-Image ON
Re-Image OFF
Re-Image ON Re-Image OFF
In the above example, Option 61 was applied to the bar code field to keep the incrementing field (Box #) from blocking out the bar code field.
Defining Field Options 4-23
O p t i o n 6 2 ( B y p a s s B a r C o d e )
This option allows the optional verifier to bypass (skip) bar code(s) on a format. The verifier does not scan any bar code with Option 62 applied to it.
Syntax
R,62 p
R1. R
R2. 62
Option Header.
Option 62. The verifier does not scan the bar code associated with this option.
Note: Adjacent bar codes on a format need to start and end on the same row (be the same height). Also, both adjacent bar codes (or neither bar code) must be scanned. However, do not apply Option
62 to all bar codes on a format or 764 errors appear.
Option 62 can be applied to any bar code on this format.
Option 62 must be applied to
BOTH adjacent bar codes.
The verifier's beam scans the entire width of the label. It cannot scan half the label's width. The verifier errors if Option 62 is applied to only ONE of the adjacent bar codes.
4-24 Defining Field Options
Example
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 p
R,62 p
The verifier does not scan or verify this UPCA bar code on the format.
Ve r i f i e r I n f o r m a t i o n
¨ There is a 0.50-inch no scan zone on the trailing edge of each label.
¨ You cannot verify adjacent bar codes that do not start and end on the same print row. See the following graphic.
B,3,13,V,310,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p Postal Code Bar code
B,4,13,V,355,200,8,4,50,8,L,0 p Tracking Number Bar code
Bar code begins at row 310
Bar code begins at
row 355
The verifier cannot verify the
"postal code" and "tracking number" bar codes, because they do not start and end on the same row.
Defining Field Options 4-25
O p t i o n 6 4 ( P r o g r a m A F I F i e l d f o r U H F R F I D )
Use Option 64 to program the AFI memory in the EPC memory bank (field) for UHF RFID tags. Unlike the AFI field for HF tags, currently, the AFI field cannot be locked for UHF tags.
Note: Do not apply a lock to the EPC memory bank since the AFI memory is part of the EPC memory bank. If the EPC memory bank is locked, the AFI memory cannot be programmed (the printer errors).
For more information about using EPC data or locking fields, refer to the
Multi-Protocol Application Notes (available on our Web site).
Syntax
R,64,field,"code",lock¦
R1. R
R2. 64
R3. field
R4. “code”
Option Header.
Option 64.
Memory field to program. Use A (AFI).
Byte code. This is an 8-bit (1 byte) character to program, enclosed within quotation marks. Range: 0-255. Use the ASCII character or the tilde followed by the equivalent three-character decimal value. For example, the letter “A” can be entered as “A” or “~041”.
Lock code. Use 0 (no lock).
R5. lock
Example
X,5,16,0,0¦
R,64,A,"A",0¦
Programs the character “A” into the AFI memory field. The data is not locked (0).
Example
X,5,16,0,0¦
R,64,A,"~046",0¦
Programs the character “F” into the AFI memory field. The data is not locked (0).
4-26 Defining Field Options
U s i n g C h e c k D i g i t s
Check digits are typically used to ensure that a text or bar code field scans correctly. If you apply Option 31, the printer calculates a check digit. A check digit scheme determines how the printer calculates a check digit.
When you define a check digit scheme, you assign a number to identify it.
This number is later entered in box R4 when you apply Option 31 to a field.
You can use check digits with text or bar code fields. Check digit calculations are performed on numeric data only.
Do not use check digits with price fields. Do not define a check digit scheme for UPC, EAN, Code 39 (with the MOD43 check digit), and Code 93 bar codes, because they have predefined check digits.
Syntax
{A,selector,action,device,modulus, fld_length,D/P,"weights" p }
A1. A
A2. selector
A3. action
A4. device
A5. modulus
A6. fld_length
A7. D/P
A8. “weights”
Check Digit Header.
Assign a number from 1 to 10 to this check digit formula.
The action to perform. Enter A to add the check digit scheme.
Format storage device. Options:
F Flash (must be formatted first. See “Formatting Flash” and
R
“Flash Memory Guidelines” in Chapter 2 for more information.)
Volatile RAM
Note: Check digits stored in flash are saved when the printer is turned off.
Number from 2 to 11. The modulus is used to divide the sum of products or the sum of digits.
The maximum number of characters the field will contain.
Range: 0 to 2710.
Algorithm. The algorithm determines how the check digit is calculated.
Options:
D
P sum of digits sum of products
String of digits used for calculation. A weight string is a group of two or more numbers that is applied to a field. The number of digits in this string should equal the number in fld_length. Enclose in quotation marks.
Range: 0 to 2710.
Defining Field Options 4-27
Example
{A,1,A,R,10,5,P,"65432" p }
Adds check digit scheme number 1 to the printer’s memory. The modulus is
10, the maximum number of characters in the field is 5. The check digit is calculated by using the Sum of Products and the string of digits used in the calculation is “65432.”
S u m o f P r o d u c t s C a l c u l a t i o n
This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Products to calculate a check digit for this data:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
1.
Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in the weight string. They are applied right to left, beginning at the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight string must contain at least two different numbers. This example has a weight string of 1,2,3,4: field: weight string:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2.
Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it: field: weight string: products:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36
3.
Next, the product of each digit is added together. This is the sum of the products.
20 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 16 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 36 = 98
4.
Divide the sum of the products by the modulus (10 in this case), only to the whole number. The balance is called the remainder.
9
10 98
90
8
4-28 Defining Field Options
5.
Subtract the remainder from the modulus.
The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check digit is 2.
10 - 8 = 2
S u m o f D i g i t s C a l c u l a t i o n
This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Digits to calculate a check digit for this data:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
1.
Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in the weight string. They are applied right to left, beginning at the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight string must contain at least two different numbers. This example has a weight string of 1,2,3,4: field: weight string:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2.
Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it: field: weight string: products:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36
3.
Next, the digits of the products are added together. Two-digit products are treated as two separate digits.
This is the sum of the digits.
2 + 0 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 1 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 3 + 6 = 44
4.
Divide the sum of the digits by the modulus (10 in this case), only to the whole number. The balance is called the remainder.
4
10 44
40
4
Defining Field Options 4-29
5.
Subtract the remainder from the modulus.
The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check digit is 6.
10 - 4 = 6
4-30 Defining Field Options
C R E A T I N G G R A P H I C S
This chapter provides information on how to
¨
¨
¨ map out the graphic image using the hexadecimal (hex) or run length method.
create a graphic packet using a graphic header, bitmap, duplicate, next-bitmap, text, constant text, line, and box fields.
place a graphic image into a format.
You can use graphic packets to create bitmapped images. To include a graphic packet within your format, your format must contain a graphic field. See “Placing the Graphic in a Format” for more information.
5
Creating Graphics 5-1
O v e r v i e w o f C o m p l i a n c e L a b e l s
You can create compliance labels by using a graphic packet for the fixed fields and a format packet for the variable fields of your compliance label.
The fixed fields of a compliance label are composed of text, lines, or boxes, which are repeated on each label. The variable fields are composed of text, bar codes, and order information, which changes with each label. Using a graphic packet for the fixed fields saves time, because the printer does not have to image all the lines or boxes each time the compliance label is printed.
Also, using a graphic packet for a compliance label reduces the number of fields in your format. Formats have a maximum number of fields per packet
(0 to 999). However, you can bypass that requirement by placing your compliance layout in a graphic packet. When you process your formats, you only need one line in the format packet to reference the graphic packet.
The following example shows how to reference a graphic packet from within a format packet.
{ start of header
F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"RDCI" p
G,57,0,0,0,0 p format header reference to graphic packet
C,40,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"To:",0 p constant text field
B,2,13,V,310,30,8,4,50,8,L,0 p bar code field
} end of header
Once you have your compliance label format set, all you need to do is add the variable sections (bar codes, addresses, and order information) to the format packet.
To see a sample compliance label graphic packet, see “Sample Compliance
Graphic Packet.” To see a sample compliance label using a graphic packet within a format, see “Sample Compliance Label.”
5-2 Creating Graphics
O v e r v i e w o f B i t m a p p e d I m a g e s
A printed image is formed through a series of dots. Each square on the grid below represents a dot on the printhead. The graphic image is created by blackening dots in a specific pattern. You can print varying shades of gray according to the concentration of dots on the image. When the dots are printed together, the end result is a graphic image.
D e t e r m i n i n g a M e t h o d
You can use one of two methods to map out your graphic image:
Hex Method The dot sequences are segmented into binary numbers and then converted to hex numbers.
A graphic using gray-scaling, several slanted lines, or several vertical lines typically translates more efficiently with hex representation.
Run Length
Encoding Method
The dot sequences are segmented into black and white strings within a row. The total count of each white string is converted to a lower-case letter, corresponding to numeric value. The total count of each black string is converted to an uppercase letter, corresponding to numeric value. This method can reduce imaging time for graphics that contain repetitive rows of dots. A graphic with horizontal lines or very few white-to-black borders typically translates more efficiently with run length encoding.
The most efficient encoding method depends on how complicated your graphic image is and whether or not imaging time is a concern. You may want to experiment with both encoding methods to get optimal performance.
Creating Graphics 5-3
D e s i g n i n g C o m p l i a n c e L a b e l s
To use a graphic packet to design your compliance label:
1.
Decide which fields are fixed (constant text, lines, boxes) and which fields are variable (addresses and shipping information).
2.
Design your compliance label as you would any other format.
D e s i g n i n g B i t m a p p e d I m a g e s
Once you determine the encoding method to use, you can begin mapping out your graphic image.
Note: The image that you map must be an upside down mirror image of the final result.
S p e c i a l C o n s i d e r a t i o n s
Solid black print cannot exceed 30% of any given square inch of the supply.
If the black print exceeds this limit, you may lose data or damage the printhead.
In the first label, the large “M” logo and thick black line exceed the allowed black to white print ratio. In the second label, the large “M” logo does not exceed the black to white print ratio.
2 inches 2 inches
Exceeds
Limit
0.5" Does not exceed limit
0.5"
Exceeds
Limit
Does not exceed limit
5-4 Creating Graphics
U s i n g t h e H e x M e t h o d
The following steps explain how to derive a hex character string from a bitmapped graphic.
Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square indicates the dot is ON, and a white square indicates the dot is OFF. A sequence of binary numbers, called a bit pattern or bitmap, determines what dots are on and off. The numbers “0" and ”1" are used for this purpose. The number “1" turns a dot on and ”0" turns a dot off.
All hex numbers must be two digits. For example, write hex 0 as 00, or hex
E as 0E.
1.
Assign 1 to every black square and 0 to every white square.
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111000000000000000000000000001111111110000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001111110000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000011110000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000001111000000000
00000000000000000000000001111100001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111110000
00000000000000000000000110000011111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111000001100
00000000000000000000000110001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111000000000000000000011111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111111111100
00000000000000000000000001111111100000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000011111111110000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000010000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000011000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000001111000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000111000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000111111000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000001111000000
00000000111111100000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110001111000000
Creating Graphics 5-5
2.
Section off the grid in columns of eight. If any rows are not divisible by
8, add enough 0’s to complete a column.
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11111000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000111 11100000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00011110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111100 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000001 10000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00001100
00000000 00000000 00000001 10001111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111111 11111100
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 10000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00111111 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000010 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000011 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000001 11100000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 11100000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 11111100 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000011 11000000
00000000 11111110 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100011 11000000
3.
One row at a time, convert each group of eight binary digits to hex.
starting at position 49 ...
00111111 = 3F
11111111 = FF
11111111 = FF
11110000 = F0
4.
Write the hex values for each row as a continuous string.
row 1, position 49 = 03FFFFFF00000
5.
Repeat steps 3 through 4 for each row on the grid.
6.
Insert the hex values in syntax format.
5-6 Creating Graphics
U s i n g t h e R u n L e n g t h E n c o d i n g M e t h o d
The following steps explain how to derive a run length character string from a bitmapped graphic.
Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square indicates the dot is ON, and a white square indicates the dot is OFF.
Note: The following example shows “1" to indicate when a square is ON, and ”0" to indicate when a square is OFF. You do not have to convert your dots when using the run length method.
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11111000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00011110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111100 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000001 10000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00001100
00000000 00000000 00000001 10001111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111111 11111100
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 10000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00111111 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000010 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000011 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000001 11100000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 11100000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 11111100 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000011 11000000
00000000 11111110 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100011 11000000
1.
Count the number of consecutive OFF or ON dots in a row. Write the number of consecutive dots in sequence for the first row on the grid.
Write “ON” or “OFF” after each number to indicate ON or OFF dots.
(row 1, position 50) 26 on
(row 2, position 39) 11 on, 26 off, 9 on
(row 3, position 34) 5 on, 45 off, 6 on
2.
Replace each number you have written with its corresponding code from the Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart provided in Appendix C, “Symbol
Sets/Code Pages.” Be sure to use CAPITAL letters for black dots and lower-case letters for white dots.
26 on (Z)
11 on (K), 26 off (z), 9 on (I)
.
.
Creating Graphics 5-7
If the number is greater than 26, write z, followed by the letter corresponding to the amount over 26. For example, to represent 45 off dots, write zs.
5 on (E), 45 off (zs), 6 on (F)
.
.
3.
Write the letter codes in sequence, uninterrupted, for each row.
(row 1,position 50) Z
(row 2,position 39) KzI
(row 3,position 34) EzsF
(row 4,position 30) DpZoD
.
.
Note: If the end of the line specifies OFF dots (lower-case letters), the ending lower-case letters can be omitted. For example, uZFu can be written as uZF.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each row on the grid.
5.
Insert the code values in syntax format.
5-8 Creating Graphics
D e t e r m i n i n g H o w t o S t o r e t h e I m a g e
Once you have mapped out your graphic image, determine how you want to store it. You have several options:
¨ Flash
¨ Volatile RAM
¨ Temporary Storage
U s i n g F l a s h
Use flash memory when the graphic image is used by several formats, because the graphic only has to be sent once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly. See “Placing the Graphic in a Format,” for more information about using the graphic packet in a format. Format flash memory before you can use it. From the Main Menu, select Setup,
Flash Memory, then, Format Flash. The process takes a few minutes.
Graphics stored in flash memory are saved when the printer is turned
off. You may need to clear flash memory, refer to your Operator’s
Handbook.
U s i n g Vo l a t i l e R A M
You should use RAM when the graphic image is used by several formats, because you only have to send the graphic image once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly. See “Placing the Graphic in a
Format,” for more information about using the graphic packet in a format.
Graphics smaller than approximately 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch can be stored in printer RAM and referenced by the graphic ID number.
Note: Graphics are stored in the format buffer and remain there until another graphic packet is sent or the printer is turned off.
U s i n g Te m p o r a r y S t o r a g e
You should use temporary storage when the graphic image is used only in one format or your graphic image is very large. Graphic data in temporary storage is held in the image buffer until the graphic is printed and then it is cleared from memory. Temporary graphics are also cleared from memory when you send a new batch or update batch. You can use the same graphic image multiple times on a format. Send the graphic image to the printer after the format to which it applies.
Creating Graphics 5-9
If a graphic is stored in temporary storage, do not place a graphic field in the format. This will cause an error. Instead, position the graphic image by using the row and column locations in the graphic packet header. Image memory (temporary storage) will accept a graphic packet 1218 rows long with 811 dots per row.
C r e a t i n g a G r a p h i c P a c k e t
Your graphic packet can contain
¨ bitmapped fields (for bitmapped images)
¨ constant text fields
¨ lines
¨ boxes
Images using hex representation or run length encoding are bitmapped images. See “Designing Bitmapped Images” to design your bitmapped image.
Once you design your graphic image, you are ready to define a graphic packet. This packet generates the graphic image you use in a format.
P o s i t i o n i n g t h e G r a p h i c I m a g e
This section explains how to position the graphic image within a graphic packet header, a field of a graphic packet, or within a format.
W i t h i n t h e G r a p h i c P a c k e t H e a d e r
When you are using RAM, the row and column parameters in the graphic header are usually 0,0, because placement is controlled by the graphic field in your format. This is especially true when designing a compliance label overlay.
When you are using temporary storage, these parameters control the placement of the graphic image on the supply.
5-10 Creating Graphics
The area enclosed within the dotted lines represents the graphic image starting at 0,0 (as defined in the graphic header).
If you want a fixed amount of white space around your graphic image, use something other than 0 for row and/or column.
The area enclosed within the dotted lines represents the graphic image starting at 0,0 with a fixed amount of white space (10,10) around the graphic image.
W i t h i n t h e F i e l d
In a bitmap, constant text, line, or box field, the row and column parameters control where an individual field or bitmapped row begins in relation to the coordinates defined in the graphic header.
The bottom of the triangle in this example represents the first field of the graphic packet starting at 10,0.
Creating Graphics 5-11
W i t h i n a F o r m a t
When you define the graphic field within your format, the row and column parameters represent where on the format to place the graphic image.
If you are doing a compliance label, these numbers are usually 0,0, because your compliance label covers the entire supply. See
"Placing the Graphic in a Format," for a sample compliance label.
If you are placing a graphic (a logo, for example) within a certain area on your supply, enter the starting position (bottom left corner) of the graphic image.
This label shows the triangle “logo” beginning
(the bottom left corner) at 400, 75 as defined in the graphic field.
D e f i n i n g t h e G r a p h i c H e a d e r
Every graphic packet must contain a graphic header. This is the first thing you enter. It identifies and provides important measurement and formatting information for the graphic. Bitmap, duplicate, next-bitmap, constant text, line, and box fields follow the graphic header, if they are used.
Syntax
{G,graphID,action,device,units,row,col, mode,"name" p
G1. G
G2. graphID
G3. action
Graphic Header.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the graphic image.
Enter A to add the graphic to the printer.
5-12 Creating Graphics
G4. device
G5. units
G6. row
Graphic storage device:
F Flash (saved when the printer is turned off)
R
T
Volatile RAM
Temporary storageNote:
Unit of measure. For bitmapped graphics, G (dots) is the only valid option.
Distance between the bottom of the graphic image area and the first bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed amount of white space around the graphic image. See “Positioning the Graphic Image,” for more information.
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
G7. column
G8. mode
G9. “name”
Example
Distance between the left edge of the graphic image area and the left edge of first bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed amount of white space around the graphic image. See “Positioning the Graphic
Image,” for more information. Use the previous table for values.
Imaging mode. Enter 0.
Graphic name (optional), 0 to 8 characters, enclose within quotation marks.
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99Wire" p
Adds a graphic image identified by number 99 to volatile RAM. The graphic uses dot measurement. The image will be placed according to the row and column parameters in the graphic field. The imaging mode is 0 and the image is called 99Wire.
Creating Graphics 5-13
C r e a t i n g B i t m a p F i e l d s
This defines one row of dots, starting at a specific row and column within the graphic image. Each unique row of dots requires a bitmap field. A bitmap field can later be repeated by using a duplicate field.
Syntax B,row,column,algorithm,"data" p
B1. B
B2. row
Bitmap Field.
Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s bottom margin to the bitmap line.
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
B3. column
B4. algorithm
B5. data
Example
Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s left edge to the bitmap line.
Use the previous table for values.
Coding method for bitmap data:
H Hex Representation
R Run Length Encoding
Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do not put spaces or any other character between the numbers. Range: 0 to 2710.
{B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0" p
Defines a bitmapped graphic field. The image begins 39 dots from the bottom and 56 dots from the left edge of the graphic area. Hex representation is used.
5-14 Creating Graphics
C r e a t i n g N e x t - B i t m a p F i e l d s
This field uses the previous field’s row and column locations. It allows you to use the bitmap or duplicate field data without having to recalculate row and column locations. This field represents one row of dots on the image.
Syntax N,adjdir,adjamt,algorithm,"data" p
N1. N
N2. adjdir
N3. adjamt
N4. algorithm
N5. “data”
Example
Next-Bitmap Field.
Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the duplicate line after or before the current row.
0
1
Increments (inserts after)
Decrements (inserts before)
For example:
B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" p
N,0,1,R,"DpZoD" p prints a next-bitmap field on row 51 at column 35.
Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Using 0 overwrites the same line.
Range: 0 to 999.
Coding method for bitmap data:
H Hex Representation
R Run Length Encoding
Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do not put spaces or any other character between the hex numbers or run length code letters.
Range: 0 to 2710.
B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0" p
N,0,1,H,"000000E00000" p
Defines a next-bitmap graphic field beginning on row 40. The row count increments by 1. Hex representation is used.
Creating Graphics 5-15
C r e a t i n g D u p l i c a t e F i e l d s
If a line of data is identical to a previous bitmap or next-bitmap field, the duplicate field allows you to repeat the dot sequence without retyping the data. A duplicate field represents one row of dots on the image.
Note: Duplicate fields are useful when you have a graphic with a lot of repetition.
Syntax
D1. D
D2. adjdir
D3. adjamt
D4. count
Example
D,adjdir,adjamt,count p
Duplicate Field.
Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the duplicate line after or before the current row.
0
1
Increments (inserts after)
Decrements (inserts before)
For example:
B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" p
D,0,20,2 p inserts row 50 again at row 70 and row 90. Rows
70 and 90 do not have to be defined later.
Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Range: 0 to 999. The above example adjusts the duplicate field to image on row 70 and 90 (adding 20 to the current row count).
Number of times to duplicate the line. Range: 0 to 999.
B,117,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
D,0,1,2 p
Defines a duplicate field that is imaged after the bitmap line. This field duplicates the preceding bitmap line twice (at row 118 and 119).
You can use constant text, line, or box fields in a graphic packet to create a compliance label overlay. See Chapter 3, “Defining Fields,” for more information about these fields.
5-16 Creating Graphics
S a m p l e C o m p l i a n c e G r a p h i c P a c k e t
A sample compliance graphic packet is shown below.
{G,57,A,R,E,0,0,0,"OVERLAY" p
L,V,500,155,90,85,3 p
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 p
L,V,500,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,400,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,298,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,200,2,0,390,5 p
C,560,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 p
C,560,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 p
C,529,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 p
C,511,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 p
C,472,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 p
C,387,10,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 p
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 p
C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 p
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 p
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 p
C,548,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH MARKING SYSTEMS",0 p
C,538,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 p
C,528,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 p
C,518,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 p
C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 p }
The sample compliance label overlay was created with this packet, using the format provided in “Placing the Graphic in a Format.”
Creating Graphics 5-17
S a m p l e H e x G r a p h i c P a c k e t
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" p
B,39,48,H,"3FFFFFF0" p
B,40,32,H,"01FFC000000FF8" p
B,41,32,H,"3E00000000000FC0" p
B,42,24,H,"03C0003FFFFFF0000F" p
B,43,24,H,"7C3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1F0" p
B,44,16,H,"0183FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF06" p
B,45,16,H,"018FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" p
B,46,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" p
B,47,16,H,"01FFFFFF80001FFFFFFFFE" p
B,48,16,H,"01FFFFF0000000007FFFFC" p
B,49,24,H,"7F800007FFFF00003FF0" p
B,50,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,51,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,52,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,53,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,70,0,H,"0400001FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
B,71,0,H,"0600001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p
B,72,0,H,"030000003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p
B,73,0,H,"01000003FFF0000000007FFE" p
B,74,8,H,"FC001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE00C0" p
B,75,8,H,"FE00003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0C0" p
B,76,8,H,"1FF803FFF0000000007FFE" p
B,77,8,H,"0FFFCFFC00000000000001C0" p
B,78,16,H,"FFDF000FFFFFFFFF8003C0" p
B,79,16,H,"7FFFC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
B,80,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,81,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,82,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" p
D,0,4,3 p
B,83,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
D,0,4,3 p
B,98,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0" p
5-18 Creating Graphics
B,99,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
B,100,24,H,"1FF9FFFFFFFFFFFFFF" p
B,101,24,H,"3FFE0007FFFF8000FF80" p
B,102,24,H,"391E0027FFFF803FFFC0" p
B,103,24,H,"1C7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" p
B,104,24,H,"1FC1FFFFFFFFFFFF1FC0" p
B,105,24,H,"0FFDFFFFFFFFFFE0FF" p
B,106,24,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8" p
B,107,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" p
B,108,32,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFF" p
B,109,48,H,"07FFFF80" p
D,0,1,2 p
B,111,48,H,"FFFFFFFF" p
B,112,32,H,"FFFF00000000FFE0" p
B,113,24,H,"078000FFFFFFFF001F" p
B,114,24,H,"78FFFFFFFFFFFFFFE060" p
B,115,16,H,"0187FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC18"
B,116,16,H,"027FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2"
B,117,16,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC"
D,0,1,2 p
B,120,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8" p
B,121,24,H,"FEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" p
B,122,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
B,123,32,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" p
B,124,32,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFF8" p } p p p
Creating Graphics 5-19
S a m p l e R u n L e n g t h G r a p h i c P a c k e t
D,0,4,4
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" p
B,39,50,R,"Z" p
B,40,39,R,"KzI" p
B,41,34,R,"EzsF" p
B,42,30,R,"DpZoD" p
B,43,25,R,"EdZZEdE" p
B,44,23,R,"BeZZMeB" p
B,45,23,R,"BcZZW" p
B,46,23,R,"ZZZA" p
B,47,23,R,"ZDsZE" p
B,48,24,"TzkU" p
B,49,25,"HtRqJ" p
B,50,27,"GsSsG" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,51,27,"ChZWgC"
D,0,4,4 p p
B,52,34,R,"ZZEdC"
D,0,4,4 p p
B,53,30,R,"NzkN"
D,0,4,4 p p
B,70,5,R,"AuGsSsG" p
B,71,5,R,"BtChZWgC" p
B,72,6,R,"DxZZEdC" p
B,73,7,R,"CtNzkN" p
B,74,8,R,"FmChZWhC" p
B,75,8,R,"GsZZEdC"
B,76,11,R,"JiNzkN" p p
B,77,12,R,"NbJzzeC" p
B,78,16,R,"JaElZKmD"
B,79,17,R,"QsSsG" p p
B,80,27,R,"ChZWgC"
D,0,4,4 p p
B,81,34,R,"ZZEdC"
D,0,4,4 p p
B,82,30,R,"NzkN" p p
B,83,27,R,"GsSsG" p p
B,98,30,R,"ZZJ"
B,99,29,R,"ZZM" p p
B,100,27,R,"JbZZE" p
5-20 Creating Graphics
B,101,26,R,"MnToI" p
B,102,26,R,"CbHnTiP" p
B,103,27,R,"CcZZC" p
B,104,27,R,"GeZWcG" p
B,105,28,R,"JaZReH" p
B,106,32,R,"ZZI" p
B,107,34,R,"ZZE" p
B,108,38,R,"ZQ" p
B,109,53,R,"T" p
D,0,1,2 p
B,111,48,R,"ZF" p
B,112,33,R,"PzfK" p
B,113,29,R,"CpZBoE" p
B,114,25,R,"DcZZGfB"
B,115,23,R,"BdZZMeB"
B,116,22,R,"AbZZVbA" p p p
B,117,22,R,"ZZZB"
D,0,1,2 p p
B,120,23,R,"ZZZ"
B,121,25,R,"ZZV"
B,122,29,R,"ZZM"
B,123,32,R,"ZZF"
B,124,39,R,"ZT" p p p p p }
Creating Graphics 5-21
P l a c i n g t h e G r a p h i c i n a F o r m a t
To include a graphic within a format:
1.
Design the graphic image as shown in “Designing Bitmapped Images.”
2.
If you are using RAM, place a graphic field in the format file to reference the graphic. See the following section, “Defining the Graphic Field,” for more information.
Note: If you are using temporary storage, you do not need a graphic field in your format to reference the graphic image.
3.
Download all the necessary packets (check digit, format, etc.).
4.
Send the graphic file to the printer, if you have not already done so.
See “Creating a Graphic Packet” for more information.
D e f i n i n g t h e G r a p h i c F i e l d
The graphic field in a format references the graphic image by the graphID in the graphic header. This field is required only if the graphic will be stored in RAM.
Syntax
G,graphID,row,col,mode,rotation p
G1. G
G2. graphID
Graphic Field.
Unique number from 1 to 999 to identify the graphic image.
5-22 Creating Graphics
G3. row Distance between the bottom of the print area on the supply to the bottom of the graphic image. Measured in selected units.
Printer
9825/
9855/
9860
9855/
9860
9855RFMP/
9855HF
Unit of
Measure
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
English
Metric
300 dpi Dots
English
Metric
203 dpi Dots
300 dpi Dots
Row or
End Row
0-1599
0-4061
0-3246
0-1199
0-3045
0-3597
0-1299
0-3299
0-2637
0-3897
Column or
End Column
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-399
0-1013
0-1197
0-399
0-1013
0-810
0-1197
G4. column
G5. mode
G6. rotation
Example
The row specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box field is added to the row value above to determine the actual position in the format.
Distance between the left edge of the print area on the supply and the left edge of the graphic. Measured in selected units. Use the previous table for values. The column specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box field is added to the col value above to determine the actual position in the format.
Imaging mode. Enter 0.
The orientation of the graphic on the supply. Enter 0.
G,57,0,0,0,0 p
Defines a graphic field that is identified by the number 57. The image begins at 0,0. The imaging mode is 0 and there is no rotation.
Creating Graphics 5-23
S a m p l e C o m p l i a n c e L a b e l
This sample format packet uses the graphic packet in “Creating a Graphic
Packet.”
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" p
G,57,0,0,0,0 p
T,1,15,V,529,252,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,2,15,V,511,252,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,110,8,L,0 p
T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,8,20,V,545,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,12,20,V,368,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0
R,1,"(420)" p } p
Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"123456789" p
2,"987654321" p
3,"42032678" p
4,"10028028662854" p
5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" p
6,"RODGER DIST CTR" p
7,"8292" p
8,"BROADWAY" p
9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p
10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" p
11," " p
12,”999991-001" p
13,"AR" p
14,"999-999999-99" p
15,"32678" p }
5-24 Creating Graphics
S a m p l e B i t m a p G r a p h i c I m a g e
The following format shows the graphic packets (hex and run length) in a sample format.
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"FMT2" p
G,99,227,35,0,0 p
Q,240,15,300,125,10," " p
T,1,5,V,285,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,2,5,V,255,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,3,15,V,180,25,0,10,1,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,4,15,V,121,35,0,1,3,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
L,S,94,15,94,235,10,"" p
B,5,12,F,50,65,1,2,40,1,L,0 p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"Pat’s" p
2,"Parts" p
3,"3/8 inch Wire" p
4,"3.55/8 Pack" p
5,"345911871209" p }
Creating Graphics 5-25
5-26 Creating Graphics
P R I N T I N G
This chapter describes how to
¨
¨
¨ download files to the printer define the batch header, batch control, and batch data files create DOS batch files.
This chapter also lists some special printing considerations.
6
Printing 6-1
Turn on the printer and make sure it is ready to receive data before you download. See your host’s documentation, system administrator, or
“Downloading Methods” for information on ways to download.
When downloading, send your packets in this order:
1.
Memory configuration packet (M)
2.
Configuration packets (A-G)
3.
Any of the following:
* Check digit packets (see Chapter 4)
* Format packets (see Chapter 3)
* Graphic packets (see Chapter 5)
4.
Batch data (see “Defining the Batch Header”)
D o w n l o a d i n g F i l e s
To download from a PC:
1.
Check that the PC and the printer are connected.
2.
Check that communications have been established between the PC and the printer.
3.
Send the communication settings packet to select the printer’s communication settings. See “Defining the Communication Settings
Packet” in Chapter 2 for more information (only used for serial communication). If you change the printer’s communication settings, make sure they match those at the host before sending any packets to the printer.
6-2 Printing
4.
Type this command at the DOS prompt:
COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1 Transmits a file called "LABEL1.FMT" to COM1.
COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1 Transmits a batch called “LABEL1.BCH” to COM1.
If you use the COPY command to download your formats, set flow control to
DTR (not XON/XOFF). Also, do not use the MS-DOS prompt from inside
Windows, because you will get a framing error.
Refer to the Operator’s Handbook or keyboard’s Operating Instructions for offline data entry and more printing information.
D e f i n i n g t h e B a t c h H e a d e r
Batch data is the actual information printed on the supply. Batch data fills in the format’s text, bar code, and non-printable text fields.
A batch packet contains the following three parts: batch header identifies the format and how many labels to print.
batch control defines the print job.
batch data
(optional) defines the actual information printed on the label.
A batch header begins the file. It tells which format the batch uses and how many labels to print. To record batch data, make a copy of the worksheet in
Appendix D, “Format Design Tools.”
Printing 6-3
Syntax
B1. B
B2. format#
B3. N/U
B4. quantity
{B,format#,N/U,quantity p
Batch Header.
Format number (1 to 999) to use.
Controls how image is generated.
N New (default). Erase image and re-image all fields using
U online data. Any missing fields will be blank.
Update last image with one or more fields.
All other fields remain the same as the last queued batch.
Quantity to print (0 to 32000). Using 0 pre-images the field to reduce the imaging time for labels. See “Batch Quantity Zero Method” for more information.
{B,1,N,1 p Example
Defines a batch header that uses format #1 and reimages all fields using the online data. One label is printed with this batch.
D e f i n i n g t h e B a t c h C o n t r o l F i e l d
The batch header must precede this field. The batch control field defines the print job and applies only to the batch that immediately follows.
Syntax
E,feed_mode,batch_sep,print_mult,multi_part, cut_type,cut_mult,ver_mode,cable_det p
E1. E Batch Control Field.
E2. feed_mode Feed Mode. Options:
0 Continuous Feed (default)
1 On-Demand
E3. batch_sep Batch Separator (striped label in between batches). Options:
0 Does not print a separator (default)
1
2
Prints a separator
Double-length separator- prints 2 tags (9855/9860)
Note: Do not use batch separators with continuous (non-indexed) supply or RFID supply. If using a stacker, the batch separator is always
3.66 inches long.
6-4 Printing
E4. print_mult
E5. multi_part
E6. cut_type
Number of tags (1 to 999) with the same image. 0 is the default.
Number of identical parts on one tag (1 to 5). 0 is the default.
Enables or disables the knife. Not all the printers support a knife. See the following chart for more information. Options:
0
1
Does not cut (default)
Cuts before, during, and after last tag - printed tag(s) left
2
3 between printhead & knife.
Cuts in strips, not each tag - printed tag(s) left between printhead & knife.
Cuts before, during, and after last tag - no printed tags left
4
5 between printhead & knife.
Does not cut before first tag, cuts each tag and after the last tag - printed tag(s) left between printhead & knife.
Cuts in strips, not each tag - no printed tags left between printhead & knife.
Cut
Mode
0
1
Description of cut mode operation
Cut Before first tag in
Batch?
No
Yes
Cut Between
Tags?
Cut After
Batch?
No
Yes*
2
3
4
5
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
(Feeds strips)
Yes
Yes
No
(Feeds strips)
Yes*
Yes**
Yes*
Yes**
Recommended Settings for optimal performance with:
Straight Edge Tags Edge Aperture Tags
Extended backfeed
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Overstrike w/verifier
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Extended backfeed
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Overstrike w/verifier
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
* The last tag in the batch is queued to be cut once it reaches the knife; however, there may be printed tags left between the printhead and the knife. The user must press FEED/CUT or send another batch to feed the last tag out far enough to be cut. Enabling extended backfeed eliminates printed tags between the knife and printhead.
** The printer feeds the last tag in the batch out far enough to be cut. No user intervention
is required to cut the last tag.
Note: The 9860 printer automatically backfeeds when necessary. See
“Defining the Backfeed Control Packet” in Chapter 2 for more information. Do not use extended backfeed when sensing on attacher-hole supplies.
Using "overstrike/continue" as the Error Action minimizes the number of RFID tags left between the printhead and knife. To use the least amount of RFID tags, set overstrike to five. Refer to the printer's Operator's Handbook for more information.
Printing 6-5
E7. cut_mult
E8. ver_mode
E9. cable_det
Number of tags to print before cutting. A cut multiple of one cuts after each tag. Range: 0 to 32,000.
0 is the default.
The cut multiple is a multiple of the print quantity. If the cut multiple is three and the print quantity is
16, then five sets of three tags and one set of one tag is produced.
Note: The last tag in the batch is always cut, regardless of the multiple.
Verifier Mode. Enables or disables the verifier. For more information about enabling the verifier, refer to the Verifier ’s Operating Instructions.
Not all the printers support a verifier. Options:
0 Disable verifier - not using a verifier (default)
1 Enable verifier
Verifier cable detect. The printer can be set to detect when a verifier’s cable is disconnected. For more information about connecting the verifier’s cables, refer to the Verifier ’s Operating Instructions. Options:
0 The printer does not detect when a cable is
1
2 disconnected (default)
I/O cable is disconnected
I/O and/or data cables are disconnected
E,0,1,4,2,1,4,1,2 p Example
Defines a batch control field. Continuous feed mode is used and a separator prints between batches. Four tags have the same image and there are two identical parts on one tag. The knife cuts after every four tags. A verifier is enabled and the printer detects when either the I/O or data cables are disconnected.
6-6 Printing
D e f i n i n g B a t c h D a t a F i e l d s
Batch data fields should be sent in field number order. Use continuation fields for large amounts of data. If you are using N (New) in the batch header, you must list all fields with your data in sequence. If you are using
U, you need to list only those fields and data that changes from the last printed batch.
Syntax field#,"data string" p
C,"continuation" p field#
“data string”
C
“continuation”
Identifies the text, bar code, or non-printable text field in which to insert the following data. Range: 1 to 999.
Provides the actual information to appear in fields. Enclose in quotation marks. Length: 0 to 2710 characters .
Identifies information to be appended to the data string. This parameter is optional.
Provides the actual information to be added to the batch packet. Enclose in quotation marks. Use this option to break up longer fields.
Length: 0 to 2710 characters. This parameter is optional.
Example
1,"Size 12"
p
2,"" p
3,"Blue" p
C,"and this would be appended." p
Defines a batch data field. “Size 12" prints in field #1, a blank line appears in field #2, ”Blue and this would be appended" prints in field #3.
Printing 6-7
U s i n g E x p a n d e d E P C G e n 2 R F I D D a t a
With version 5.0 or greater software, we support Expanded C1Gen2 RFID data, which is composed of five different fields:
¨ EPC Data (64 or 96-bits)
¨ User Memory
¨ Lock Code
¨ Access Password
¨ Kill Password
The printer also accepts EPC data following the guidelines in the
EPCglobalä Tag Data Standards Specification, which conforms to the EPCä
Radio-Frequency Identity Protocols Class 1 Generation 2 UHF RFID
Protocol for Communications at 860-960MHz Standards (RFID Air Interface protocol). Refer to the EPC Specification to create valid EPC data.
Many different RFID supplies (tags) are available and the amount of programmable user memory varies with the chip embedded in the tag.
Depending on your tag type, all memory fields may not be available. Refer to the RFID Setup Guide & Supply Chart for details about the available user memory for each chip.
Note: Incrementing an Expanded C1Gen2 RFID Data Field is not supported.
Use the access password to control when new data can be written to a field.
The kill password sets a tag up to be inoperable. The lock code contains the locking method.
6-8 Printing
One of the four locking methods can be selected for each memory field
(EPC, access password, and kill password). Depending on the locking method specified, the memory field may or may not be readable or writable.
There are four locking methods.
0
Value
1
2
3
EPC Lock Name
No lock
Permalock
Password lock
Permalock and
Password lock
Description
The selected memory fields are readable and writable.
The tag can be programmed multiple times.
Permanently locked in a readable and writable state.
The tag can be programmed multiple times.
Requires access password to rewrite the selected memory fields. The tag can be programmed multiple times with the password.
Never rewritable, but always readable. The tag can never be rewritten, once locked.
Note: The EPC field is always readable, no matter what locking method is assigned.
The following tables describe the locking method for each memory field.
EPC Memory
0
1
2
3
D e s c r i p t i o n
E P C i s r e a d a b l e a n d w r i t a b l e .
E P C i s p e r m a n e n t l y w r i t a b l e ( c a n n e v e r b e l o c k e d ) .
E P C i s o n l y w r i t a b l e w i t h p a s s w o r d , b u t i s r e a d a b l e .
E P C i s n e v e r r e w r i t a b l e , b u t i s r e a d a b l e .
User Memory
0
1
2
3
Description
U s e r m e m o r y i s r e a d a b l e a n d w r i t a b l e .
U s e r m e m o r y i s p e r m a n e n t l y w r i t a b l e ( c a n n e v e r b e l o c k e d ) , b u t i s r e a d a b l e .
U s e r m e m o r y i s o n l y w r i t a b l e w i t h p a s s w o r d , b u t i s r e a d a b l e .
U s e r m e m o r y i s n e v e r r e w r i t a b l e , b u t i s r e a d a b l e .
Printing 6-9
Access Password
0
1
2
3
Description
Access password is readable and writable.
Access password is permanently writable (can never be locked).
Access password is never readable.
Access password is never readable or rewritable.
Kill Password
0
1
2
3
Description
Kill password is readable and writable.
Kill password is permanently writable (never locked), but is readable.
Kill password is only writable with password.
Kill password is never readable or rewritable.
To use the Expanded C1Gen2 data, you need to modify the RFID Field’s batch data.
Syntax field#,"EPC_data~028" p
C,"User_Mem~028" p
C,"~028" p
C,"Acs_Pwd~028" p
C,"Kill_Pwd~028" p
C,"Lock_Code" p field# Identifies the RFID Data Field number for the following data.
Range: 1 to 999.
“EPC_data~028" EPC data. Enclose in quotation marks. To create EPC data, follow the guidelines in the EPC Global Generation 1 Tag Data Standards
Specification. The data must be in the same format (ASCII Hex, ASCII, etc.) specified in the RFID Data Field (data_type).
The printer can program 96-bits of data (24 ASCII Hex characters).
The data must end with the ASCII field separator (decimal 028).
“User_Mem~028" User Memory. Enclose in quotation marks. The amount of programmable user memory varies with the tag types. Refer to the RFID Setup Guide &
Supply Chart for details about the available user memory for each chip.
The printer (version 6.2 or greater) can program up to 512-bits of data
(128 ASCII Hex characters). The data must be ASCII Hex characters and end with the ASCII field separator (decimal 028).
Note: Do not enter more characters than the user memory space available. For example, if your tag has 96-bit user memory available, you cannot enter more than 96-bits of data for this field.
However, you can enter less than 96-bit without an error.
6-10 Printing
“~028" Identifies information to be appended. Reserved for future use. Only include the field separator (decimal 028) in this field.
“Acs_Pwd~028" Access Password. This must be 8 ASCII Hex characters. No password is assigned if this field is left blank. The data must end with the ASCII field separator (decimal 028).
“Kill_Pwd~028" Kill Password. This must be 8 ASCII Hex characters. No password is assigned if this field is left blank. The data must end with the ASCII field separator (decimal 028).
“Lock_Code~028" Five-digit locking method for each field in this order:
EPC Data, User memory, Reserved, Access password, and Kill password.
Use 0 for the reserved field. Locking options:
0 No lock (default)
1
2
3
Permalock
Password lock
Permalock & password lock
Note: Use only one locking method per field. The printer is not capable of unlocking a field. Depending on the locking method used for each field, the EPC data may be programmable by sending the access password with the batch data.
Example
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"PERMLOCK" p
X,1,100,0 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"313233343536373831323334~028" p
C,"ABCDEF~028" p
C,"~028" p
C,"73737373~028" p
C,"CAD01234~028" p
C,"11001" p }
The EPC data is 313233343536373831323334, the user memory data is
ABCDEF, the access password is 73737373, and the kill password is
CAD01234. Selects permalock (1) as the locking method for the EPC, user memory, and kill field. Selects no lock (0) for the access password field.
The EPC, user memory, and kill fields are permanently readable/writable.
Printing 6-11
U s i n g S p e c i a l C h a r a c t e r s i n B a t c h D a t a
There are two ways to specify special characters in batch data:
¨ Place a tilde (~) before each character
¨ Use a tilde with the decimal ASCII equivalent
For example, you can use “” or ~034 to print the “ character in your batch data; otherwise, the tilde characters are ignored. You can also use ~XXX where XXX is the decimal equivalent of an unprintable character.
S a m p l e B a t c h D a t a w i t h S p e c i a l C h a r a c t e r s
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"123~034456789" p
2,"~094983~’126LG4451" p
Decimal Character
~034 is “
~094 is ^
~126 is ~
What Prints
123"456789
^983~’LG4451
M e r g e d o r S u b - F i e l d s
If a field is completely filled by data copied from other fields, use quotation marks without spaces between them for the "data string" parameter.
6-12 Printing
I n c r e m e n t i n g F i e l d s
In incrementing fields, the first number in the sequence must contain the same number of digits as the highest number to be counted. For example, to increment the numbers in a field from 1 to 999, enter the starting number in the batch as 001.
S p e c i a l P r i n t i n g C o n s i d e r a t i o n s
Keep in mind the following special printing considerations when using a
9855 or 9860 printer.
9 8 5 5 P r i n t e r
Speed
2.5/4.0/6.0 ips
8.0 ips
10.0 ips
12.0 ips
Printing direct transfer direct transfer direct transfer direct transfer
Printhead
Density
203/300 dpi
203/300 dpi
203 dpi only
203 dpi only
Knife supported not supported not supported not supported
Peel Mode supported supported not supported not supported
Verifier supported supported supported supported
* The minimum label feed length is 0.75 inches using 8, 10, or 12 ips printing. 94x5 emulation is not supported using 300 dpi. The maximum supply and image length with the optional 300 dpi printhead is 12.0 inches (305 mm). The recommended print speed using linerless supplies is 2.5 or 4.0 ips.
Contact your Monarch Representative for supply requirements in high temperature and high humidity environments.
9 8 5 5 R F I D P r i n t e r
The RFID printer pauses while programming the RFID tag.
9 8 6 0 P r i n t e r
Speed
2.5/4.0/6.0 ips
8.0 ips*
Printing direct transfer direct transfer
Printhead
Density
203/300 dpi
203/300 dpi
Knife supported supported
Verifier supported supported
* The 9860 printer allows cutting 1.2 inch feed length tags at 8.0 ips; however optimal cut quality may not be achieved.
Printing 6-13
S e r i a l B a r C o d e P r i n t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
Keep in mind the following serial bar code printing information when using a
9855 or 9860 printer.
Speed
2.5 ips
4.0 ips
6.0/8.0/10.0 ips
Printhead
Density
203/300 dpi
203 dpi
203 dpi
Minimum Bar Code Narrow
Element less than 3 dots
3 dots
4 dots or more
D o w n l o a d i n g M e t h o d s
You can download the format and batch data using one of three methods: sequential, batch, and batch quantity zero.
S e q u e n t i a l M e t h o d
Using the sequential method, you send all your format and batch data at one time. Use this method when your application does not require operator intervention to input data. All data is sent down at one time, and the printer then images each field. As soon as the last field is imaged, your labels begin to print.
Example
{Format}
{Batch Packet}
B a t c h M e t h o d
This is similar to the sequential method, but it is used when you want to send multiple batches. All data for the first batch is sent at one time, and the printer then images each field. As soon as the last field for the first batch is imaged, labels begin to print. This process is repeated for each subsequent batch.
Example
{Format}
{Batch Packet}
{Batch Packet}
6-14 Printing
B a t c h Q u a n t i t y Z e r o M e t h o d
You may use the batch quantity zero method when your application requires operator intervention to enter data. While the operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch quantity of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print it. After the operator enters the data for the last field, the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and the label prints almost immediately.
To use the batch quantity zero method:
1.
Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time you send the batch header, use the parameter N (new batch), and the parameter
0 for (zero quantity). This ensures the label is properly positioned.
The printer images constant text, line, and box fields, but does not print them.
2.
Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header using the parameter U (batch update) and a quantity of zero. When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the field, but does not print it.
At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including fields that copy from other fields.
3.
Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.
4.
For the last field, input data and send a batch header with the quantity of labels you want printed. When the printer receives input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels. See “Reducing Imaging Time” in
Chapter 9 for an example using the batch quantity zero method.
M o d i f y i n g F o r m a t s
The optional entry method is a quick way to modify your format fields, check digit fields and configuration packets.
O p t i o n a l E n t r y M e t h o d
This method enables you to reset only the parameters you want to change.
Commas act as placeholders for unchanged parameters. The optional entry method reduces file size and increases the speed at which files are sent to the printer.
Printing 6-15
C r e a t i n g D O S B a t c h F i l e s f o r D o w n l o a d i n g
If you are downloading from an MS-DOS system, you can create batch files to set communication values and download formats. It is a good idea to create a subdirectory to hold your format files.
Here is a DOS batch file that sets a serial port, changes to a subdirectory, and downloads a check digit file, format file, and batch data file.
MODE COM1: 9600,N,8,1,P
CD\PAXAR
COPY LABEL1.CDS COM1
COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1
COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1
Refer to your DOS manual for more information on creating batch files.
6-16 Printing
S T A T U S P O L L I N G
This chapter explains how to use status polling.
There are two types of Status Polling:
¨
¨
Inquiry Request—information about the readiness of the printer.
Job Request—information about the current (or last received) job downloaded to the printer.
7
Status Polling 7-1
I n q u i r y R e q u e s t ( E N Q )
An ENQ character acts as a request for printer status information. You can send an ENQ in front of, in the middle of, or immediately following any packet downloaded to the printer. An ENQ is a command that can be executed as part of a packet or sent on its own (using a communications program). An ENQ is processed immediately. The ENQ character is user defined.
The ENQ character does not appear as a visible character; however, we are representing the ENQ character as E .
I n q u i r y R e s p o n s e
Printer status is returned to the host in a 3-byte (3-character) sequence.
The first byte is the non-printable user-defined ENQ character, which is not visible on the response. The second and third bytes are printer status codes. See the ENQ Reference Tables for the meaning of bytes 2 and 3.
Example: E AB
The status codes (A and B in this case) are ASCII equivalents to the hexadecimal bits that represent the various types of status responses. This response indicates that the printer is online (Character A) and that there is a stock fault (Character B).
Example: E ??
Indicates that this is the first ENQ response since the printer was turned on.
Send another ENQ immediately to receive the printer’s status.
Example: E @@
Indicates the printer is offline.
7-2 Status Polling
The following graphics can be used as a quick reference for the Status of
Byte #2 and Byte #3. Byte #1 is the non-printable user-defined ENQ character.
Status Polling 7-3
U
V
W
X
R
S
T
N
O
P
Q
K
L
M
^
_
]
\
Y
Z
[
`
H
I
J
D
E
F
G
@
A
B
C
E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 2
Char Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
Comp.
Failure
Corr.
Error
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 6
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 5
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
Online
Data
Error
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
Busy Active Online
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
0
Note: A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
7-4 Status Polling
E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 2 ( c o n t i n u e d )
Char Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
Comp.
Failure
Corr.
Error w x y u v s t p q r n o l m z
{
|
}
~
Dec 127 j i k g h e f a b c d
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 5
1
1
1
1
1
Busy Active Online
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
Online
Data
Error
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
Note: A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
Status Polling 7-5
W
X
Y
Z
T
U
V
Q
R
S
M
N
O
P
^
_
`
]
[
\
J
K
L
F
G
H
I
C
D
E
@
A
B
E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 3
Char
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 6
1
1
1
Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 5
0
0
0
Low
Battery
Format
Error
Waiting to
Dispense
Label
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 3
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
0
Ribbon
Fault
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
Stock
Fault
Online
Error
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Bit 0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Bit 1
0
0
1
Note: A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
7-6 Status Polling
E N Q R e f e r e n c e Ta b l e - B y t e # 3 ( c o n t i n u e d )
Char y z
{ w x u v r s t o p q
}
|
~
Dec 127 k l m n h i j f g d e a b c
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 6
1
1
1
1
Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 5
1
1
1
1
Low
Battery
Format
Error
Waiting to
Dispense
Label
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
Ribbon
Fault
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
1
0
0
Stock
Fault
Online
Error
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 1
1
0
0
1
Note: A “1" indicates the bit is turned on. A ”0" indicates the bit is off.
Status Polling 7-7
J o b R e q u e s t
A Job Request returns status information about the most recently processed print job. You can send a job request after an ENQ or batch. You can send two levels of Job Requests:
¨ Numeric Error Codes Only (0, 1, or 2)
¨ Verbose (3 or 4)
Syntax {J,#}
Field Type
Identifier request#
Valid Options
J
2
3
4
0
1
Description
Job Status Request
Returns ASCII coded strings or numeric error codes
Returns error number
Returns number of labels printed in batch
Example
{J,3}
The job response may not be immediate. If the printer has an error (out of supplies, ribbon problem, etc.), is in pause mode, or has insufficient memory, correct the problem and then resend the job request. If the problem is not corrected, no response is returned. If a formatting error has occurred, the job request will return the status. The printer must first interpret the format and batch data before returning the response.
Note: You may need to press FEED/CUT before the job response is returned.
To clear an error, press ESCAPE/CLEAR. An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than 500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The printer cannot accept another job request until the error is resolved.
7-8 Status Polling
J o b R e s p o n s e
The Job Response varies, depending on the type of request sent to the printer. The following syntax is the response for a Job 0, 1,or 2 request.
Syntax
{J,Status1,Status2,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Status1
Status2
These errors stop the print job. Examples include out of stock, supply faults, or data formatting errors. These errors are numbered less than 24 on the “Job Status 0,
1, 2 Response Table,” later in this chapter.
These are errors in the syntax of the MPCL data stream.
Printing does not stop, but the information may not print properly. These errors are numbered greater than 24 on the “Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table,” later in this chapter.
The format or batch number is returned.
FMT-1/BCH-2
Here is an example of a response returned to a J 0, 1, 2 request:
{J,8,0,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Indicates that a portion of the format extends off the tag in format 1, batch
2. Refer to the “Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table” later in this chapter for brief explanations for J, 0, 1, 2 requests. In the above example, refer to error 8 for an explanation.
Status Polling 7-9
The following syntax is the response for a Job 3 request. You may need to press FEED/CUT before the job response is returned.
Syntax
{J,"Status1 A,B","Status2
A,B,C,D,E","FMT-1","BCH-2"}
“Status1 A,B” Status1 A contains the field number, in the format or batch, where an error was found. If the error is not in the format or batch, a “0" is returned.
Status1 B contains an error number, which represents the actual printer error. The error numbers can be found in Chapter 8, ”Diagnostics and Errors."
Example {J,"2,612",}
2 is the field number where an error was found. 612 is the error number, indicating that data is missing or does not match the format definition for that field.
Note: Error numbers found in Status1 B, always have a value equal to or greater than 500. These are considered very serious errors.
“Status2 A,B,C,D,E” contains the packet type, field type, field number, parameter, and error number.
Status2
A- Packet Type represents the MPCLII packet that the error occurred on. The packet could be Format (F), Batch (B), Check
Digit (A), Graphic (G), or Font (W).
Status2
B- Field Type
Status2
C- Field Number represents the MPCLII field that the error occurred on.
If the packet has no fields, Status2 A will be replicated.
If the error occurs before the field is identified a question mark is sent. Since the batch data is variable, a D is sent to indicate data.
represents the field number within each packet. The packet header is the first field and each subsequent field is indicated by the field separator.
7-10 Status Polling
Status2
D- Parameter
Status2
E- Error Number represents the parameter within the field that the error occurred. The numbering begins after the field identifier.
is the error that coincides with the error numbers presented in Chapter 8, “Diagnostics and Errors.”
“FMT-1/BCH-2" The format or batch number is returned.
Note: If more than one error occurred, only the most serious error is acknowledged.
{J,"","F,B,4,6,33","FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Indicates that an error occurred on a bar code (B) field within a format (F) packet. The bar code field is the fourth (4) field in the packet. The error occurred in the sixth (6) parameter of the field. Error number 33 means the bar code density is invalid.
To clear an error, press ESCAPE/CLEAR. An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than 500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The printer cannot accept another job request until the error is resolved.
The following syntax is the response for a Job 4 request.
Syntax
{J,printed,total,"FMT-1","BCH-2"} printed total the number of tags or labels already printed in the batch.
the total number of tags or labels to be printed in the current batch.
“FMT-1/BCH-2"
Example
The format or batch number is returned.
{J,8,25,"FMT-3","Bch-2"}
8 out of 25 tags or labels have been printed from format number 3.
Use a Job Request 4 when printing in the on-demand mode with a large number of tags or labels from a single batch. A Job Request 4 may not be accurate if tags or labels are printed in continuous mode, because of the response time involved. A Job Request 4 is not useful in single ticket batches (printing 1 of 1) or multiple single ticket batches.
Status Polling 7-11
Note: A batch has to be printing when you send the job request. You cannot use this job request on batches printing formats with incrementing fields.
J o b S t a t u s 0 , 1 , 2 R e s p o n s e Ta b l e ( S t a t u s 1 C o d e s )
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
24
Number
0
1
2
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
Meaning
No error
Stacker fault
Supply problem
Hot printhead
Printhead open
Insufficient memory
Ribbon problem
Field ## extends off tag
Field ## has a bad font/bar code
Field ## contains invalid data
Field ## has a graphic missing
Invalid communication channel
Invalid file type
All communication channels are busy
Receive overrun error
Receive parity error
Receive framing error
Receive buffer full
Label waiting
Bad dots (verifier detected a failure)
Low battery
Memory configuration packet error
Numbers 25 through 50 are not currently in use.
7-12 Status Polling
J o b S t a t u s 0 , 1 , 2 R e s p o n s e Ta b l e ( S t a t u s 2 C o d e s )
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
63
64
65
66
67
75
80
81
82
83
84
Number
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Meaning
Invalid command
Invalid separator value
Graphic not found
Format for batch not found
Quantity/Multiples out-of-range
Name descriptor too long
Invalid cut value
Invalid number-of-parts value
Invalid orientation value
Invalid thickness value
Invalid text field
Invalid bar code field
Data string too long
Invalid data field
Row greater than stock length
Row greater than format length
Column greater than printhead width
Column greater than format width
Invalid label length
Invalid label width
Invalid increment/decrement value
Identifier out-of-range
No field to create format
Stop location of a line is out of range
Syntax error
Can’t use offline format for online batch
Can’t queue graphic batch
Can’t store online format
Can’t queue online batch
Can’t queue online clear command
Status Polling 7-13
S t a t u s P o l l i n g C o n s i d e r a t i o n s f o r S c r i p t M o d e
The following table shows the effects of the I Packet and the printer’s front panel (or keyboard) on status polling and immediate commands.
Status Polling
Immediate Commands
I Packet Printer
Configuration Packet
(inside the script or sent online to the printer)
OFF (status polling not enabled by I packet)
ON (status polling enabled by I packet)
OFF (immediate commands not enabled by I packet)
ON (immediate commands enabled by I packet)
While Running in Script Mode ONLY
(set through printer’s front panel)
Disabled
OFF (status polling not enabled through printer’s front panel)
OFF (status polling not enabled through printer’s front panel)
OFF (immediate commands not enabled through printer’s front panel)
OFF (immediate commands not enabled through printer’s front panel)
OFF (status polling enabled through printer’s front panel)
ON (status polling enabled through printer’s front panel)
OFF (immediate commands enabled through printer’s front panel)
ON (immediate commands enabled through printer’s front panel)
Enabled
If status polling and immediate commands are NOT enabled through the I
Packet, enabling status polling and immediate commands at the printer’s front panel has NO effect.
7-14 Status Polling
D I A G N O S T I C S A N D E R R O R S
This chapter explains how to
¨
¨
¨ print diagnostics labels reset the printer call Technical Support.
Before you call Service, print a test label. The label contains information to help diagnose mechanical and setup problems.
This chapter also provides explanations of your printer’s errors.
The errors are classified by type and are listed in order. If you have trouble loading supplies or performing maintenance, refer to the Operator’s Handbook.
Some errors numbered 400-438 and 500-574 are internal software errors. Errors numbered 703-758 are supply errors. Follow the directions provided with the error description to correct the problem. Errors numbered 900-999 are Hard Printer Failures. If you cannot clear an error, turn off the printer, wait several seconds and then turn on the printer. Call Technical Support if you receive any error message not listed in this chapter.
To clear a data error, press ESCAPE/CLEAR. If a formatting error occurs, the label prints; but data may be missing. Correct the format or batch and resend them to the printer. If a data error occurs, press FEED/CUT to queue and print an error label.
8
Diagnostics and Errors 8-1
P r i n t i n g a Te s t L a b e l
1.
From the User Diagnostics menu, press the right arrow until you see
USER DIAG
Test Label
2.
Press ENTER/PAUSE.
The test label shows the model number, software version, total number of inches printed, voltage, print contrast, printhead resistance, code page,
MPCL control characters, ENQ and RS232 characters.
R e a d i n g a Te s t L a b e l
The first label shows the printer’s configuration by packet (A-M). See
Chapter 2, “Configuring the Printer,” for more information. The lines beginning with M show the printer’s memory allocation, which can be changed. The units for supply position, etc. are displayed in dots, even if you entered them in English or Metric units.
The second label shows the model number, software version, total number of inches printed, number of inches printed by current printhead, voltage, print contrast, printhead resistance, number of bad dots, and installed options (see the following table). The test label for the 9855 and 9860 printers show an inch count for the high energy ribbon. The one-dot rule line at the bottom of the test label indicates the vertical 0,0 point.
8-2 Diagnostics and Errors
L
P
R
S
V
C
H
A
B
Installed Options Description
Network Control Language (NCL)
Battery
Cutter (Knife)
High Speed (12 ips)
Smart Relay
Peel mode
RS-232 option (Keypad)
Stacker
Verifier
I f Yo u R e c e i v e a n E r r o r M e s s a g e
Any time you receive a message that is not described in this manual, or the recommended action does not solve the problem, call Technical Support.
Some errors are the result of communication problems. In this case, reset your printer and reboot your computer. If you change any of the online configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer, so the configuration changes take effect.
R e a d i n g a n E r r o r L a b e l
An error label queues and prints when you press
FEED/CUT after a data error (0-499) occurs. The error label contains the packet type, field type, line number, and error number. The packet and field type return the first letter after the { or p . A “?” is returned if the letter cannot be determined. The line number refers to which line in the packet the error occurs. The error number is the three-digit error code. Use this information to correct the format, batch, font, check digit, graphic, or online configuration packet.
The first label shows an error in line 8, which is a constant text field within the format packet. The error number is 18.
The second label shows an error in line 1 of the batch packet. The error number is 101.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-3
I f t h e P C a n d P r i n t e r A r e N o t C o m m u n i c a t i n g
If your PC is having trouble communicating with your printer, follow these steps:
¨ Check any messages that occur at the printer and at the computer. See the following error message listing in this chapter for more information.
¨ Make sure you are using the correct printer cable.
¨ Make sure the cable is plugged into the correct port on the computer.
¨ Compare your printer’s communications settings (especially flow control) with the settings on your PC. Your printer and PC communications should match. Print a test label to identify the printer’s communication settings.
¨ Make sure the printer is online (ready to receive data).
If all of the above are correct, reset your printer. Try the function again. If you still can not establish communications, call Technical Support.
R e s e t t i n g P r i n t e r s
Sometimes, the printer receives mixed signals and loses its ability to communicate. If this happens, reset the printer and attempt communication again. To reset the printer, turn off the printer, wait 15 seconds, and turn it back on.
When you turn off the printer, all the information set through the online configuration packets (A-M) is saved. See the sections in Chapter 2,
“Configuring the Printer,” for more information about each packet.
8-4 Diagnostics and Errors
C a l l i n g Te c h n i c a l S u p p o r t
Technical support representatives are available Monday through Friday during regular business hours. Follow these steps before you call:
1.
Make sure your PC and printer are properly connected.
2.
Record any error messages that occurred.
3.
Recreate the problem, if you can.
4.
Check your port settings. Your problem may be corrected simply by changing the communication settings.
5.
List any changes that have recently been made to the system. Try to record what you were doing when the problem occurred.
6.
Reset your printer. For information on resetting your printer, see
"Resetting Printers."
7.
Reboot your computer. Refer to your computer documentation for specific instructions.
8.
Print a test label, see “Printing a Test Label” for more information.
Have the following information ready before you call: computer brand name and model, version of DOS, printer model, other peripheral devices on your system, support agreement, contract number, or invoice information, customer number, and printer serial number.
A d d i t i o n a l D i a g n o s t i c s I n f o r m a t i o n
For detailed printer diagnostics information, refer to the Operator’s
Handbook. See Chapter 7, “Status Polling,” for information on requesting printer and job status. See the following error message listing in this chapter for more information.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-5
D a t a E r r o r s
Errors 001 to 499 are data errors. These errors are returned in response to a J,3 request. See Chapter 7, “Status Polling,” for more information. A data error indicates that incorrect data was received from the host, causing the printer to ignore the entire print job. After checking the packet and correcting the problem, transmit the print job again.
The following is a list of data errors. These errors occur because data in the format, batch, check digit, font, or graphic packet is invalid.
F o r m a t E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
001 Packet ID number must be 1 to 999.
002
003
004
005
006
007
010
011
012
Name must be 1 to 8 characters (excluding non-printable control characters) inside quotes. The range is 1 to 256 characters for the 9855 XML-enabled printer.
Action must be A (add) or C (clear).
Supply length is invalid. See “Defining the Format Header” in
Chapter 3 for valid lengths.
Supply width is invalid. See “Defining the Format Header” in
Chapter 3 for valid widths.
Storage device must be F (Flash), R (volatile RAM), or T
(temporary for graphics).
Unit of measure must be E (English), M (Metric), or G (Dots). See
“Defining the Format Header” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Field ID number is outside the range 0 to 999.
Field length exceeds 2710.
Row field position is greater than the maximum stock dimension.
See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid row lengths.
8-6 Diagnostics and Errors
013
014
015
016
017
018
020
021
022
023
024
Column field position is greater than the maximum stock dimension. See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid column widths.
Font style must be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 15, 16, 17, 18, 50, or
56. See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 or Appendix B,
“Fonts,” for more information.
Character rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree),
2 (180 degree), or 3 (270 degree). See “Defining Text Fields” in
Chapter 3 for more information.
Field rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree), 2 (180 degree), or 3 (270 degree). See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Field restriction must be V (variable) or F (fixed).
Code page/symbol set selection defined in the field must be 0
(Internal), 1 (ANSI), 100 (Macintosh), 101 (Wingdings), 102
(Unicode), 103 (BIG5 for Unicode), 104 (GB2312 for Unicode),
105 (SJIS for Unicode), 106 (GB2312), 107 (BIG5), 437 (DOS
Page 437), 850 (DOS Page 850), 852 (Latin 2), 855 (Russian),
857 (Turkish), 860 (Portuguese), 1250 (Latin 2), 1251 (Cyrillic),
1252 (Latin 1), 1253 (Greek), 1254 (Turkish), 1255 (Hebrew),
1256 (Arabic), 1257 (Baltic), or 1258 (Vietnamese). See “Defining
Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Vertical magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.
Horizontal magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.
Color must be A, B, D, E, F, N, O, R, S, T, or W. See “Defining
Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots.
Field justification must be B (balanced), C (centered), E (end),
L (left), or R (right). See “Defining Text Fields” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-7
043
044
045
046
051
052
032
033
040
041
042
025
030
031
String length is outside the range 0 to 2710.
Bar code height must be at least 19 (English), 48 (Metric), 38 (203 dpi Dots), 57 (300 dpi Dots), or is not within the supply dimensions.
6
7
8
1
5
Human readable option must be
0 default no CD or NS
NS at bottom, no CD
CD at bottom, no NS
CD and NS at bottom no text
Bar code type is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in
Chapter 3 for valid options.
Bar code density is invalid. See “Defining Bar Code Fields” in
Chapter 3 for the bar code density chart.
Line thickness must be 0 to 99 dots.
Line direction must be 0, 90, 180, or 270.
End row is invalid. Line segment or box end row is defined outside of printable area.
End column is invalid. Line segment or box end column is defined outside of printable area.
Dot pattern for line or box must be “”.
Line length is defined beyond the maximum length. See “Defining
Line Fields” in Chapter 3 for valid lengths.
Line type must be S (segment) or V (vector).
Imaging mode in the graphic header must be 0.
Data type in the RFID Data Field must be 0, 1, 2, or 3. See
“Defining the RFID Data Field” in Chapter 3 for more information.
8-8 Diagnostics and Errors
B a t c h E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
101 The format referenced by batch is not in memory.
Print quantity is outside the range 0 to 32000. 102
104
105
106
107
108
109
Batch mode must be N (new) or U (update).
Batch separator in a batch control field must be 0 (Off), 1 (On), or
2 (Double).
Print multiple is outside the range 1 to 999.
Cut multiple is outside the range 0 to 999. Only valid for printers with a knife.
Multiple part supply is outside the range 1 to 5.
Cut type is outside the range 0 to 5.
201
202
203
204
205
206
O p t i o n E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
200 Option number must be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 20, 21, 30, 31, 42, 50, 51,
52, 60, 61, or 62.
Copy length is outside the range 0 to 2710.
Copy start position must be 1 to 2710.
Destination start position must be 1 to 2710.
Source field must be 0 to 999.
Copy type must be 1 (copy after rules) or 2 (copy before rules).
Increment/Decrement selection must be I (increment) or
D (decrement).
Diagnostics and Errors 8-9
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
207
208
209
210
211
212
Incrementing start position must be 0 to 2710.
Incrementing end position must be 0 to 2710.
The incrementing amount must be 0 to 999.
Security value for a PDF-417 bar code must be 0 to 8. Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.
Narrow element value is less than 1 or greater than 99. Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.
Wide element value is less than 1 or greater than 99. Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.
Dimension must be 1 to 30 for a column or 3 to 90 for a row on a
PDF417 bar code.
Truncation code must be S (standard) or T (truncated bar code).
Aspect code must be C (columns) or R (rows).
Option definition must be S (set) or T (template).
Input device device must be D (Default), H (Host), K (Keyboard),
N (None), or S (Scanner).
Pad direction must be L (from left) or R (from right).
Pad character is outside the range 0 to 255.
Check digit selection must be G to generate check digit.
Primary or secondary price format is outside the range 1 to 16.
Data type restriction is outside the range of 1 to 6.
Option is not valid for the field.
Bar code intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots. (This is also known as the additional character gap when using Option 50,
Defining Bar Code Densities.)
8-10 Diagnostics and Errors
226 Rule (option) Record Line xx. The upload device must be H (host) for Option 6.
O n l i n e C o n f i g u r a t i o n E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
251 Power up mode must be 0 (online) or 1 (offline).
252
253
254
Language selection must be 0 (English), 1 (French), 2 (German),
3 (Spanish-ES), 4 (Japanese), 5 (Portuguese), 6 (Italian), 7
(Swedish), 8 (Spanish2-MX), 9 (Danish), 10 (Dutch), 11 (Finnish), or 12 (Norwegian).
Batch separator code in a system setup packet must be 0 (off), 1
(on), or 2 (Double).
Slash zero selection must be 0 (standard zero) or 1 (slashed zero).
255 Supply type must be 0 (black mark), 1 (die cut), 2 (non-indexed), or 3 (aperture).
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
Ribbon selection must be 0 (direct), 1 (transfer) or 2 (High
Energy).
Feed mode must be 0 (continuous) or 1 (on-demand).
Supply position must be -300 to 300 dots.
Contrast adjustment must be -699 to 699 dots.
Print adjustment (position) must be -99 to 99 dots (9825) or -450 to 450 dots (9855/9860).
Margin adjustment (position) must be -99 to 99 dots.
Speed adjustment must be 0 (default), 25 (2.5 ips), 40 (4.0 ips),
60 (6.0 ips), 80 (8.0 ips), 100 (10.0 ips), or 120 (12.0 ips).
Diagnostics and Errors 8-11
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
282
283
Primary monetary symbol must be 0 (None), 1 (Dollar), 2 (Pound),
3 (Yen), 4 (Deutsche Mark), 5 (Franc), 6 (Peseta), 7 (Lira), 8
(Krona), 9 (Markka), 10 (Schilling), 11 (Rupee), 12 (Ruble), 13
(Won), 14 (Baht), 15 (Yuan), or 16 (Eurodollar).
Secondary symbol selection must be 0 (none) or 1 (print secondary sign).
Monetary decimal places must be 0 to 3.
Character string length in the control characters packet must be 5
(MPCL control characters) or 7 (ENQ/IMD command character).
Baud rate selection must be 0 (1200), 1 (2400), 2 (4800), 3
(9600), 4 (19200), 5 (38400), 6 (57600), or 7 (115200). Resend the communication settings packet.
Word length selection must be 0 (7 bits), or 1 (8 bits). Resend the communication settings packet.
Stop bits selection must be 0 (1 bit), or 1 (2 bits). Resend the communication settings packet.
Parity selection must be 0 (none), 1 (odd), or 2 (even). Resend the communication settings packet.
Flow control selection must be 0 (none), 1 (DTR), 2 (CTS/RTS), or
3 (XON/XOFF). Resend the communication settings packet.
Symbol set (code page) in the System Setup packet must be
0 (Internal), 1 (ANSI), 2 (DOS 437), 3 (DOS 850), 4 (1250- Latin
2), 5 (1251- Cyrillic), 6 (1252- Latin 1), 7 (1253- Greek), 8 (1254-
Turkish), 9 (1255- Hebrew), 10 (1256- Arabic), 11 (1257- Baltic),
12 (1258- Vietnamese), 13 (852- Latin 2), 14 (855- Russian), 15
(857- IBM Turkish), 16 (860- DOS Portuguese), 17 (Wingdings),
18 (Macintosh), 19 (Unicode), 20 (BIG5), 21 (GB), 22 (SJIS to
SJIS), 23 (GB to GB), 24 (BIG5 to BIG5), or 25 (KSC to KSC).
Cut adjustment must be -300 to 300 dots.
RS232 Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3 characters.
ENQ Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3 characters.
8-12 Diagnostics and Errors
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
The buffer type must be D (Downloadable Fonts), F (Format), I
(Image), R (Receive), T (Transmit), or V (Scalable Fonts).
The storage device type in the memory configuration packet must be F (flash) or R (volatile RAM).
The buffer size is invalid.
The printhead width must be 0.
The battery voltage must be 0 (15-volt battery) or 1 (12-volt battery).
The printer address specified in the communication settings packet must use exactly six characters.
Action must be 0 (disable), 1 (enable), or 2 (extended) for the backfeed control packet or the printer is active.
Dispense position must be 50 to 200 dots or the printer is active.
Backfeed distance must be 10 to 200 dots or the printer is active.
The backfeed distance can not be greater than the dispense position.
The skip index selection defined in the field must be 0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled). Correct the packet and resend to the printer.
The verifier mode must be 0 (disable) or 1 (enable).
The verifier’s cable detect mode must be 0 (no detect), 1 (I/O cable detect), or 2 (I/O and data cable detect).
C h e c k D i g i t E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
310 Check digit scheme number must be 1 to 10.
311 Modulus must be 2 to11.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-13
314 Check digit algorithm must be D (sum of digits) or P (sum of products).
352
380
400
402
403
404
328
340
350
351
G r a p h i c E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
325 Duplicating direction must be 0 (insert after) or 1 (insert before) in duplicate fields for graphics.
327 Amount of row adjustment must be 0 to 999 dots in duplicate fields for graphics.
405
406
Duplicate count must be 0 to 999.
Bitmap line encoding must be H (hex) or R (run length).
Font selector must be 1 to 9999.
Font data length must be 68 to 16384.
Insufficient font memory is available for the downloaded font.
Job request is outside the range 0 to 4.
The character immediately following { is invalid.
Field separator is not in the expected location.
Field separator was not found.
The number (greater than five digits/732,000), string (greater than
2710), or tilde sequence (greater than 255) currently being processed is out of range.
Too many fields exist in the format. You cannot have more than
1000 fields in the format. Lines, boxes, and constant text fields count as fields.
Parser error. Format or graphic is already in use. Make sure your packet not missing p or {} characters.
8-14 Diagnostics and Errors
C o m m u n i c a t i o n E r r o r s
Error
Code
Description
409 The printer memory is full. Delete unnecessary formats or graphics from memory. If you are using a graphic file that is very large, consider using another mapping method (such as run length encoding) to reduce the required memory. To use flash memory, you must format it first. See “Formatting Flash Memory” in
Chapter 2 for more information.
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
Parity on the printer does not match the parity on the host. Check the parity setting under SETUP options.
Framing error. The printer cannot communicate with the host.
Make sure the host is turned on, communication cables are connected correctly, port settings are correct, and communications are active. Check the baud rate, word length, and stop bits to make sure they match those at the host. Do not toggle between Microsoftâ Windowsâ and MS-DOS while using the COPY command, or you will receive a framing error. Exit
Windows before using the COPY command. Re-transmit the data.
There is a problem with flow control between the printer and the host. Make sure the printer and the host flow control settings match (both are DTR or both are XON/XOFF). If the error persists, call Technical Support.
Online receive buffer is full. Check your printer’s XON/XOFF or
DTR SETUP values to be sure there is not a flow control problem.
The internal keyboard buffer is full or you need a new keypad.
Call Technical Support.
The buffer size you defined exceeds the total available in your machine.
Flash/PC board error. Call Technical Support.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-15
429
430
433
497
499
417
424
425
426
427
420
421
422
423
428
Flash memory is full. Clear flash. Resend the format, graphic, and check digit packets. If the error reappears, call Technical
Support.
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
Duplicate internal name. Call Technical Support.
Internal software error. Call Technical Support.
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
Format name is invalid. Valid name is 1 to 8 characters inside quotes or “” for a printer-assigned name. Press ESCAPE/CLEAR and try to continue. If the error reappears, call Technical Support.
Batch name is invalid or graphic not found. Press
ESCAPE/CLEAR and try to continue. If the error reappears, call
Technical Support.
A field number appears more than once in a format.
The format uses a graphic or verifier configuration packet that cannot be found.
The batch references a field number that does not exist in the format.
An error occurred during the loop back test on the parallel port.
Call Service.
An error occurred during the loop back test on the serial port.
Call Service.
8-16 Diagnostics and Errors
D a t a F o r m a t t i n g F a i l u r e s
Formatting errors indicate that a field will print incorrectly. After you have checked the data stream and corrected the data, retransmit the format and batch.
Note: For errors 571-622, the batch still prints, but the field, font, bar code, or density may be incomplete, missing or contain incorrect data.
Description Error
Code
571
572
573
574
575
600
601
603
611
UPC or EAN bar code data length is invalid. The bar code data length in the batch does not fit the format.
A copy field, padded field, or incrementing field length is invalid.
The field length in the batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks. Or, the fixed length field does not contain the specified number of characters.
Price field length is invalid. The price field length in the batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks.
No CD scheme or room for CD. The CD scheme in the batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks.
The graphic included in your format could not be found. Resend the graphic packet. If the error persists, call Technical Support.
The printer could not image the batch, because the batch was refused. Call Technical Support.
An error occurred while the batch was imaging. Resend the format, batch, font, and/or any graphic packets. If the error persists, call Technical Support.
The batch was not found while imaging. Resend the batch packet.
If the error persists, call Technical Support.
Font, bar code or density is invalid. The font, bar code or density in the batch does not fit the format.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-17
612
613
614
615
618
619
620
616
621
622
The data in this line of the batch is either missing or does not match the format.
Reference point off tag.
Portion of field off tag. There may be an invalid character in the packet. Make sure you did not enter O for Ø.
Bar code width is greater than 16 inches or the number of keywords for your PDF 417 bar code exceeds 928. Decrease the density or shorten the amount of data to print the bar code.
A bad dot falls on a bar code and the dot cannot be shifted. A gray box is printed instead of the bar code. However, 2D bar codes still print on the 9825 printer when bad dots are present within the bar code field.
Magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 (point size) for the scalable font.
The JIS (16-bit) code for Kanji is invalid.
Font and printhead dot density mismatch. A 300 dpi font is specified in the format, but a 203 dpi printhead is used in the printer or vice-versa. Check the font or change the printhead to correct the error.
An error occurred opening the TrueType font file. Select a different font to download. If the error message persists, call
Technical Support.
Not enough memory to create the downloaded TrueType characters in the scalable (vector) fonts buffer. Reconfigure the printer’s memory and increase the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
Resend the font, format, and batch packet after reconfiguring the memory. If the error message persists, call Technical Support.
8-18 Diagnostics and Errors
M a c h i n e F a u l t s
These errors occur when there is a problem with the printer.
Error
Code
Description
703 The printer sensed a calibration of different-sized black marks.
Make sure the correct supply is loaded.
704
710
711
712
713
714
715
Printer has not sensed a supply mark within the specified number of inches or out of supplies.
Check the
¨
¨
¨
¨ supply tracking supply marks black mark sensor position supply roll for binding.
Press ESCAPE/CLEAR. If the error continues to appear, change the supply.
Band out of data. Call Technical Support.
UART receiving communication error (framing, parity, etc.). Call
Technical Support.
Receiving failure or command overrun error. Call Technical
Support.
Receiving failure or illegal command. Call Technical Support.
Receiving failure or undefined command. Call Technical Support.
Invalid data length/data mismatch. The data in the RFID Data
Field has an incorrect data length or there is a data type mismatch between the selected data type and the actual data entered. See
“Defining the RFID Data Field” in Chapter 3 for more information on the data length and for selecting the appropriate data type for the data being entered. This error also occurs if any of the
Expanded C1Gen2 fields is invalid. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-19
730
732
A memory allocation error occurred during initialization.
RFID Hardware Error. A non-RFID printer received a format containing an RFID Data Field.
R F I D E r r o r s
These errors occur when there is an RFID problem.
Error
Code
Description
740 Command, hardware, inventory, or memory allocation error.
There may be an RFID hardware or memory allocation error. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
741
742
743
RFID tag missing. Tag not found in RF Field. The RFID tag was not found in the RF Field (area inside the printer where RFID tag is programmed.) Check supply loading. If you changed the supply or print position, make sure the RFID tag was not moved out of the programmable range. The printer does not recalibrate
(feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
Tag erase failed. The RFID tag was found in the RF Field, but could not be erased. Increase the number of write retries. If this error occurs consecutively, increase or decrease the write power setting. If the write power is set too low, you may affect the data programmed in adjacent labels. The printer does not recalibrate
(feed a blank label) after any RFID error. For more information, refer to your RFID Setup Guide & Supply Chart.
Program tag failed. The RFID tag was found in the RF Field, but could not be programmed. Increase the number of write retries.
If this error occurs consecutively, increase or decrease the write power setting by one. If the write power is set too low, you may affect the data programmed in adjacent labels. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error. For more information, refer to your RFID Setup Guide & Supply Chart.
8-20 Diagnostics and Errors
744
746
747
Tag locked fail. The RFID tag is unable to be programmed, because it is already locked. This is considered a bad RFID tag.
The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any
RFID error.
Lock tag fail. The RFID tag has not been locked to prevent reprogramming. This is considered a bad RFID tag. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
Time out failure. Any RFID command (read, program, etc.) has failed to complete in the maximum amount of allowed time. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
748
749 RFID verify fail. The RFID verification process failed after writing
(programming) the tag. This is considered a bad RFID tag. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
M a c h i n e F a u l t s ( c o n t i n u e d )
Error
Code
Description
750
Invalid data length/data mismatch from RFID interrogator module.
The RFID interrogator module found a problem with the data received from the printer. The printer does not recalibrate (feed a blank label) after any RFID error.
751
Printhead is overheated. Turn off the printer to let the printhead cool. If the error persists, call Technical Support.
Printer did not sense a black mark when expected. The supply may be jammed. For errors 751-753, check the
¨
¨
¨
¨ supply tracking supply marks black mark sensor position supply roll for binding.
Press ESCAPE/CLEAR and try to continue printing. If the error continues to appear, change the supply
Diagnostics and Errors 8-21
755
756
757
759
760
761
762
752
753
754
758
763
764
Printer sensed a mark in the wrong place.
Printer sensed a mark that is too long.
Printer has a ribbon problem. Check the ribbon for a jam or remove any slack by turning the take-up reel clockwise. Load a new ribbon.
Printhead is open. Close the printhead before continuing. If the error persists, call Technical Support.
The printer is out of supplies. Load supplies.
Load supplies. The calibrated supply length differs by plus or minus .25 inches from the format. Press FEED/CUT to print on the current supply or load new supply and press ENTER/PAUSE.
Check supply. Either the supply is not seen, or the on-demand sensor is broken (purchase optional). Check for a label jam.
Clear the supply path or reload supplies. This error may occur if you remove a label too quickly in on-demand mode. The printer does not recalibrate after this error.
Knife is not moving. Call Technical Support.
Knife jam. Call Technical Support.
The stacker is full or jammed. Empty the stacker or clear the jam before continuing. The printer does not recalibrate after this error.
Low Voltage. For DC-powered printers, recharge the external battery. For AC-powered printers, check the power inlet where the printer is connected. The acceptable voltage range is between
90-132 V
RMS
and 180-264 V
RMS
. If more or less power is received, unpredictable results may occur.
Waiting to dispense label. Press FEED/CUT.
Verifier scan error (bad scan) on label when using normal (no overstrike) mode. Press ESCAPE/CLEAR to clear the error and continue printing. Make sure you did not apply Option 62 (do not scan a particular bar code) to all bar codes on a format.
8-22 Diagnostics and Errors
769
770
771
766
767
768
765
772
773
781
782
783
784
The printhead has less than 8 bad dots. The printer can shift bar code fields to avoid bad dots. You may need to press
ESCAPE/CLEAR to continue printing. Print a test label to confirm the number of bad dots.
Backfeed/overfeed error. There is a problem with the backfeed or overfeed distance.
Incorrect AD value. Call Technical Support.
Printhead has more than 8 bad dots within the format area or is not connected. Make sure the printhead is connected.
The printhead is not receiving enough volts. Call Technical
Support.
The print motor is not ready. Call Technical Support.
The format specified by the application was not found. Reload your application and format, and try again. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.
Verifier scan error (bad scan) on label or multiple labels in a row when using overstrike and continue mode. Press
ESCAPE/CLEAR to clear the error and continue printing.
Verifier Failure - the verifier is enabled, but not connected. The printer can detect if the I/O and/or serial cables are connected to the verifier. Refer to your verifier’s Operating Instructions for more information.
The voltage is too low. Call Technical Support.
The voltage is too high. Call Technical Support.
The printer is printing too fast for the verifier to accurately scan the bar codes. Increase the bar code height in your formats or slow the print speed.
No power to stacker. Check connections between the stacker and the printer. Make sure the printer is connected to an AC outlet.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-23
785
790
791
792
793
794
795
The internal liner take-up reel is full. Remove the liner take-up reel and dispose of the liner. Press ESCAPE/CLEAR to continue printing.
Wait until the printer is idle (no batch waiting to print or not receiving data) before you send any packets. This error may occur when you try to print a test label if the printer is busy.
The printer has an error pending. Turn off the printer. Wait 15 seconds and turn it back on. Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.
The printer is not initialized. Call Technical Support.
The printer job queue is full. Turn off the printer. Wait 15 seconds and turn it back on. Resend the packets. If the problem continues, call Technical Support.
The backfeed mode is not set.
Print engine lock-up. Call Technical Support.
S c r i p t E r r o r s
These errors occur when there is a script (application) problem.
Error
Code
Description
850 Invalid script packet or not enough flash memory for the script.
The script download failed. Format flash memory and download the script using the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
851 Invalid lookup table or not enough flash memory for the script.
The lookup table download failed. Check the data in the lookup table. Format flash memory and download the script using the
COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
8-24 Diagnostics and Errors
855
856
857
858
852
853
854
859
Invalid buffer definition packet or not enough flash memory for the script. One or more of the following buffers were invalid: input buffer, temporary buffer, lookup buffer, printer, or array buffer.
Check the buffer definitions. Format flash memory and download the script using the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
Invalid version string or not enough flash memory for the script.
The version information in the APPVERSION command is missing or invalid. Make sure the information is enclosed in double quotation marks. Format flash memory and download the script using the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
Invalid table (string and numeric) data or not enough flash memory for the script. Check the data. Format flash memory and download the script using the COPY command from DOS or the
ADK2 software.
Invalid start/clear command. The script is missing the start or clear command {S space}.
Invalid quit command. The script is missing the quit command
{Q space}.
Illegal command in the script. Your script may include commands that have been removed from the ADK2 scripting language.
Check sum error. Each packet has a four-digit checksum at the beginning of the packet. Compile the script again using the ADK2 software.
Script download buffer overflow. The image buffer is used as the
SCRATCH buffer. Increase the size of the image buffer.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-25
907
908
909
910
911
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
901
902
903
905
906
H a r d P r i n t e r F a i l u r e E r r o r s
These errors are hard printer failures. Call Technical Support if you receive these messages.
Error
Code
Description
900 RAM test failure.
ROM/EPROM checksum failure.
Software timer failure.
Software interrupt failure.
Illegal interrupt.
Non-maskable interrupt. Check format packet for font clear or format clear packets.
Low RAM error.
Non Volatile RAM checksum failure.
RAM corrupted.
Warm restart.
Version string mismatch.
Flash erase error.
Flash write error.
RAM write error.
Parity error.
Framing error.
Buffer overrun.
Invalid record type.
8-26 Diagnostics and Errors
937
938
939
940
Invalid hex data.
Invalid checksum.
Invalid record count.
Invalid flash address.
Errors numbered 900-911 occur when you turn on the printer. They may indicate a circuit board failure. Errors numbered 930-940 are errors that may occur during the loading of flash memory. Errors numbered 950-999 indicate a circuit board failure. Call Technical Support if you receive any of these messages.
When a HARD failure (errors 900-999) occurs on the printer, the printer displays WARNING or POWER DOWN on the top line of the keypad display.
If this happens, record the displayed message and turn off the printer. If the problem reoccurs when you turn the printer on again, call Technical Support.
If the problem does not reoccur after you turn your printer on again, reset your printer’s SETUP options. Retransmit your packets.
Printer
Display
WARNING
RAM Test Failure
Description
RAM check failed on power up. Reset your SETUP options. Transmit your packets again.
ROM checksum test failed.
POWER DOWN
ROM Sum Failure
POWER DOWN
Timer Failure
Timer test failed.
POWER DOWN
Intr Test Failure
POWER DOWN
Low System RAM
Interrupt test failed.
Not enough RAM for system. Reset your SETUP options. Transmit your packets again.
POWER DOWN
Illegal Intr#
Illegal interrupt occurred.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-27
POWER DOWN
NMI Received
POWER DOWN
Low Appl RAM
POWER DOWN
NVRAM Sum Fail
POWER DOWN
RAM Corrupt
Non-maskable interrupt occurred. Reset your
SETUP options. Transmit your packets again.
Not enough RAM for application. Reset your SETUP options. Transmit your packets again.
RAM checksum test failed. Reset your SETUP options. Transmit your packets again.
Item storage RAM failed. Reset your SETUP options. Transmit your packets again.
8-28 Diagnostics and Errors
P R I N T E R O P T I M I Z A T I O N
This chapter provides information on how to improve your printer’s performance by
¨
¨
¨ adjusting the print quality reducing the imaging time for printing providing general tips and hints for designing formats.
This printer uses “smart imaging” to image and print fields on supplies. Smart imaging remembers the exact boundaries and locations of each field and places a boundary box (white space) around each field. When a field changes that particular boundary box is cleared and the new field data is imaged. However, the new field data may require a larger boundary box than the previous field did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change may be covered with white space from the changing field’s boundary box. To prevent existing fields from being covered by a changing field, see “Option 61 (Reimage Field)” in Chapter 4.
Note: Smart imaging is automatically disabled on formats with a Data
Matrix bar code.
9
A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t Q u a l i t y
Many factors affect print quality: type of supplies, print speed, print contrast, and the type of printer’s application. This printer supports both thermal transfer and thermal direct supplies. The type of supply should match the printer’s application.
¨ If you want to print at high speeds, you should use premium supplies.
Using premium supplies reduces smudged images, hard to read labels, and faded print. Supply type, print speed, and print contrast work together to improve the print quality of labels. Contact your Sales
Representative for more information.
¨ Select the print speed based on desired throughput and print quality. If print quality is more important, reduce the print speed, because a lower print speed increases the print quality of labels. If throughput is more important, increase the print speed as high as it will go to give you the needed print performance. See “Increasing Throughput” for more information.
Printer Optimization 9-1
¨ If the print quality is too light or too dark, adjust the print contrast. The correct contrast setting is important because it effects how well your bar codes scan and how long the printhead lasts.
Be sure to check the print quality of bar codes with a bar code verifier or scanner. If you do not have a verifier or scanner, check the bar code visually. A bar code that is IN SPEC will have complete bars and clear spaces. Small alphanumeric characters will look complete. A bar code that is IN SPEC may not look as good as one that is too dark, but it will have the highest scan rate.
Dark IN SPEC Light
Note: For highest scan rates, make sure there is adequate white space before and after the bar code. Also, a darker bar code does not mean it will scan better.
The following non-print zones are recommended:
All Supplies
All Supplies
.050 inches on either edge of the label.
.020 inches at the end of the label.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum no-scan zone on the trailing edge of the label of 0.5 inches (13 mm).
9-2 Printer Optimization
R e d u c i n g I m a g i n g T i m e
Imaging time is the time it takes the printer to image the data for the first label after the printer receives the format and batch packet. There are several ways to reduce the imaging time: send formats and configurations once, use a batch quantity of zero, or update batch fields.
¨ If the formats use the same check digit scheme, you only need to send the check digit scheme once.
¨ Send formats once and use the batch update field to change information on the label. Using a batch update field reduces the imaging time, because only the fields that change are imaged. All other fields remain the same as the last queued batch.
¨ Use the batch quantity zero method when your application requires operator intervention to enter data. While the operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch quantity of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print it. After the operator enters the data for the last field, the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and the label prints almost immediately.
To pre-image a label:
1.
Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time you send the batch header, use the parameter N (new batch), and the parameter
0 for (zero quantity).
Example
{B,1,N,0 p }
The printer images constant text, line, box, and graphic fields, but does not print them.
2.
Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header using the parameter U (update) and a quantity of zero. When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the field, but does not print it.
Example
{B,1,U,0 p
1,"RODGER DIST CTR" p }
{B,1,U,0 p
2,"8292" p }
At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including fields that copy from other fields.
Printer Optimization 9-3
3.
Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.
{B,1,U,0 p
3,"BROADWAY" p }
{B,1,U,0 p
4,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p }
4.
For the last field, input data and send it with the quantity of labels you want printed. When the printer receives input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels.
Example {B,1,U,10 p
5,"DAYTON, OHIO" p }
I n c r e a s i n g T h r o u g h p u t
Reducing the imaging time increases throughput. You can also increase the baud rate to increase the transmission time and increase throughput. Make sure the communication settings at the printer match those at the host.
Using a baud rate of 19200 is almost twice as fast as 9600 baud. Using a baud rate of 38400 is almost twice as fast as 19200 baud.
G e n e r a l F o r m a t T i p s a n d H i n t s
The following tips and hints are helpful to keep in mind when designing
MPCLII formats.
W i t h P a c k e t s
¨ Leave parameters blank that you do not need to change when sending online configuration packets. For example, { I,A,,,,1 p } prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online system setup parameters.
You can group fields with similar parameters. For example
T,1,10,V,250,50,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0 p
T,2,15,,,75 p
T,3,,,,100 p
The first text field sets all the parameters for that field. The second text field’s number of characters and column location changes from what was defined in the first field. In the third text field, only the column location is changed. This method can be used on bar code and constant text fields as well.
9-4 Printer Optimization
Note: You should understand the basics of each field before using this method.
After you modify any fields or parameters with the optional entry method, resend the format, batch, or configuration packet to the printer.
W i t h B a r C o d e s
¨ Be careful when rotating or placing a UPC/EAN bar code with human readable characters, because the bottom reference point is at the bottom of the bars, not at the bottom of the human readable characters.
W i t h F i e l d s
¨ Data that remains the same for each label should be in a constant text field. Data that varies for each label should be in a text field.
¨ Check for trailing spaces in text or constant text fields if you receive a
“field off tag” error. An easy way to see trailing spaces is to print the field in the reverse font.
¨ Make sure if you magnify a field, it does not go off the label or cover another field. Magnifying a field increases the distance between the printed character and the edge of the cell.
Printer Optimization 9-5
9-6 Printer Optimization
S A M P L E S
This appendix contains sample formats. You can customize any of these formats to meet your needs.
A
Samples A-1
S a m p l e U P C A F o r m a t P a c k e t
{F,25,A,R,E,200,200,"Fmt 25" p
C,140,40,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"SAMPLE FORMAT" p
B,1,12,F,85,40,1,2,40,5,L,0 p
T,2,18,V,50,50,1,3,1,1,B,L,0,0 p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,25,N,1 p
1,"02802811111" p
2,"TEXT FIELD" p }
A-2 Samples
2
3
0
1
S a m p l e M a x i C o d e P a c k e t s
MaxiCode is a two-dimensional bar code developed by UPS (United Parcel
Service, Inc.). Data must be defined in a specific way for UPS. Refer to the
Guide to Bar Coding with UPS or the AIM MaxiCode Specification for more details about data requirements.
The printer supports modes 0, 1, 2, and 3. Contact us for information about additional MaxiCode modes.
Mode
Obsolete
Obsolete
Structured Message
Structured Message
Description
You can select which mode to use in the bar code field or allow the printer to auto-select the mode (0, 2, or 3) based on your data. See “Defining a
Bar Code Field” for more information. MaxiCode automatically pads data with the “!” character.
Note: MaxiCode does not support the NULL character.
Modes 2 and 3 are defined by the way the postal code, class of service, and country code fields are arranged. (The postal code, class of service, and country code are required fields.) Begin with the message header, then the primary data (15 characters), followed by the secondary message (up to 78 characters). Or, begin with the primary data, then the message header, followed by the secondary data. If the postal code data characters are all numeric then the MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 2. If the characters are alphanumeric, or only contain ASCII characters 65 to 90, then the MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 3.
If you receive an error 612, check your MaxiCode data. You may have not correctly structured or left out one of the three required fields (postal code, class of service, and country code) or the “~029" character.
Samples A-3
M o d e 0 ( O b s o l e t e ) S a m p l e
{F,1,A,R,E,0200,0200,"MAXICODE" p
B,1,93,V,020,20,33,7,0,8,L,0 p }
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"450660000" p
C,"001" p
C,"840" p
C,"[)~030" p
C,"01~02996" p
C,"1Z12345678~029" p
C,"UPSN~029" p
C,"12345A~029" p
C,"070~029" p
C,"~029" p
C,"1/1~029" p
C,"15~029" p
C,"Y~029" p
C,"60 SADDLEBROOK CT.~029" p
C,"DAYTON~029" p
C,"OH~030" p
C,"~004" p }
MaxiCode bar code (33)
Batch header
Postal code- zip code
(This field determines Mode)
Country code
Class of service
Message header
Transportation header
Tracking number
Origin carrier SCAC
UPS shipper number
Julian day of pickup
Shipment ID (empty)
Package count
Weight (lb.)
Address validation
Street address (empty)
City (empty)
State
EOT
A-4 Samples
M o d e 2 S a m p l e
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"MAXI_M2" p
B,1,93,V,020,020,33,7,0,8,L,0 p }
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"[)>~030" p
C,"01~02996" p
C,"068100000~029" p
C,"840~029" p
C,"001~029" p
C,"1Z12345675~029" p
C,"UPSN~029" p
C,"12345E~029" p
C,"089~029" p
C,"~029" p
C,"1/1~029" p
C,"10~029" p
C,"Y~029" p
C,"~029" p
C,"~029" p
C,"CT~030" p
C,"~004" p }
MaxiCode bar code (33)
Message header
Transportation header
Postal Code
(This field determines Mode)
Country code
Class of service
Tracking number
Origin carrier SCAC
UPS shipper number
Julian day of pickup
Shipment ID (empty)
Package count
Weight (lb.)
Address validation
Street address (empty)
City (empty)
State
EOT
Samples A-5
M o d e 3 S a m p l e
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"MAXI_M3" p
B,1,93,V,020,020,33,7,0,8,L,0 p }
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"[)>~030" p
C,"01~02996" p
C,"M5E1G45~029" p
C,"124~029" p
C,"066~029" p
C,"1Z12345679~029" p
C,"UPSN~029" p
C,"12345E~029" p
C,"089~029" p
C,"~029" p
C,"1/1~029" p
C,"10~029" p
C,"Y~029" p
C,"~029" p
C,"TORONTO~029" p
C,"ON~030" p
C,"~004" p }
MaxiCode bar code (33)
Message header
Transportation header
Postal Code
(This field determines Mode)
Country code
Class of service
Tracking number
Origin carrier SCAC
UPS shipper number
Julian day of pickup
Shipment ID (empty)
Package count
Weight (lb.)
Address validation
Street address (empty)
City (empty)
State
EOT
A-6 Samples
M a x i C o d e C o m p r e s s i o n S a m p l e
Once the data is properly encoded in the compressed format as rendered by the UPS.dll, the UPS scanners and software do the translating of the compressed data when reading the symbol. Our printers take the input data as-is and encode it as a standard MaxiCode symbol. Without the UPS encoded scanners and software, generic scanners interpret the encoded data exactly as it appears in the symbology without decompressing its contents.
28,"[)>~030" p
C,"01~02996" p
C,"453420000~029" p
C,"840~029" p
C,"013~029" p
C,"1Z12121212~029" p
C,"UPSN~029" p
C,"564W65~030" p
C,"07’4N%KKL8X5~044" p
C,"9T#VO:Z+Z 0~028" p
C,"SFBH3R#&ZAT/~028" p
C,"87EPJ)~028" p
C,"S~013" p
C,"~030" p
C,"~004" p
Samples A-7
S a m p l e D a t a M a t r i x P a c k e t s
Data Matrix (ECC-200) is a two-dimensional bar code which is made up of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are 24 square symbol sizes available ranging from 10 rows by 10 columns to 144 rows by 144 columns. There are six rectangular symbol sizes available ranging from 8 rows by 8 columns to 16 rows by 48 columns. The symbol size is data dependent. Data Matrix automatically pads data.
Make sure you do not overlay other fields when designing your Data Matrix symbol. Smart imaging is automatically disabled on formats with a Data
Matrix bar code. You should also allow a 3 or 4 dot “quiet zone” (blank space around the bar code’s perimeter) for scanning. See “Defining a Bar
Code Field” for more information.
S a m p l e B a t c h D a t a w i t h S p e c i a l C h a r a c t e r s
To use this character in the bar code null character
~ (tilde)
FNC1 enter these characters in the batch data
~~@
~126~126
~~1
S q u a r e D a t a M a t r i x P a c k e t
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1" p
B,1,50,V,50,100,35,0,100,8,L,0 p }
{B,36,N,1 p
1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" p }
This example prints a one-inch wide by one-inch tall (100) square Data
Matrix symbol using the default density (0) without any field rotation (0).
R e c t a n g u l a r D a t a M a t r i x P a c k e t
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX2" p
B,1,400,V,100,200,35,29,50,8,L,1 p }
{B,36,N,1 p
1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" p }
This example prints a one-inch by a half-inch tall (50) rectangular 16 rows by 36 columns (density 29) Data Matrix symbol rotated 90 (1).
A-8 Samples
S a m p l e D a t a M a t r i x w i t h F u n c t i o n 1
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1" p
B,1,50,V,10,50,35,0,50,8,L,0 p}
{B,36,N,1 p
1,"~~110012345678902" p}
This example prints a 0.50-inch wide by 0.50-inch tall (50) square Data
Matrix symbol using the default density (0) without any field rotation (0).
FNC1 appears in the batch data as ~~1.
S a m p l e Q u i c k R e s p o n s e P a c k e t s
Quick Response (QR Code) is a two-dimensional bar code, which is made up of square modules arranged in an overall square pattern. A unique finder pattern is located at three corners of the symbol. Four levels of error correction are available, along with a wide range of symbol sizes.
¨ Model 1 is the original specification.
¨ Model 2 is an enhanced form that includes additional features.
The maximum number of characters depends on the type of characters entered for the batch data and differs for the two models of QR Code.
Data Type
Numeric data
Alphanumeric data
8-Bit data
Kanji data
Model1
1167
707
486
299
2710
2710
2710
1817
Model2
QR Code can accommodate Japanese Kana and Kanji characters and has a variety of applications, including marking spark plugs, radiators, printed circuit boards, and test tubes. Refer to the AIM International Symbology
Specification for more details about data requirements.
Samples A-9
E n t e r i n g B a t c h D a t a f o r Q R C o d e
QR Code requires certain parameters at the beginning of all batch data.
Syntax
"error_cor mask# data_input, char" error_cor mask# data_input char
Example
Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the error correction is high enough. Options:
H
Q
Ultra high reliability level
High reliability level
M
L
Standard level
High density level
Note: As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of characters (in the field) decreases.
Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.
Type of data input. Options:
A Automatic
M Manual
Type of characters. Options:
A Alphanumeric
B
K
N
Binary
Kanji
Numeric
Note: In binary mode, the number of characters must be represented by the 4-digit number in decimal.
1,"HM,N0123456789012345" p }
Defines the following batch data for the QR Code: The error correction level is H, which provides very high reliability. Leave the mask number blank.
The data input mode is Manual. The type of characters are Numeric and the data is 0123456789012345.
Q R C o d e P a c k e t
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE" p
B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 p
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"HM,N0123456789012345" p }
A-10 Samples
S t r u c t u r e d A p p e n d M o d e
QR Code offers a mode called structured append (or concatenated) that allows you to collect data from multiple QR Code symbols and use that data elsewhere. For example, the components of a sub-assembly can have individual QR Codes and the QR Code for the entire assembly contains all the data from the individual codes. This mode also requires certain parameters at the beginning of all batch data.
Syntax
"mode_id code# #of_div parity, error_cor mask# data_input char" mode_id code#
#of_div parity error_cor mask# data_input char
Mode identifier. Use D to indicate the structured append (or concatenated) mode.
Code number of the individual symbol in the concatenated set. You must use a two-digit number in decimal.
Total number of symbols in this concatenated set. You must use a two-digit number in decimal.
Parity byte. You must use a two-digit number in hexadecimal. There is no standard parity byte.
Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if the error correction is high enough. Options:
H
Q
Ultra high reliability level
High reliability level
M
L
Standard level
High density level
Note: As you increase the error correction level, the maximum number of characters (in the field) decreases.
Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.
Type of data input. Options:
A Automatic
M Manual
Type of characters. Options:
A Alphanumeric
B
K
N
Binary
Kanji
Numeric
Note: In binary mode, the number of characters must be represented by the 4-digit number in decimal.
Samples A-11
Example
1,"D0205E9,Q0A," p
C,"B006qrcode," p }
Defines the structured append mode (D) for QR Code. This is symbol (02) of a concatenated set containing (05) symbols. The parity byte is E9. The error correction level is Q, which provides a high reliability. Use 0 for the mask number. The data input mode is Automatic. The type of characters are binary (B) and there will be six (06) data characters (qrcode).
S t r u c t u r e d A p p e n d Q R C o d e P a c k e t
{F,2,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE2" p
B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"D0202E9,Q0A" p
C,"0123456789ABCD+__ âôû~129~064~159~252~224~064" p }
S a m p l e G S 1 D a t a B a r P a c k e t
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,""¦
B,1,30,V,5,5,38,4,0,0,L,0,1,2,22¦}
{B,1,N,1¦
1,"123456|Monarch Brand Printers"¦}
S a m p l e G S 1 D a t a B a r w i t h F u n c t i o n 1
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"UCC AB"¦
B,1,30,V,5,65,38,4,35,0,L,0,11,2,22¦}
{B,1,N,1¦
1,"~02910ABC¦~029Monarch Brand Printers"¦}
S a m p l e A z t e c P a c k e t
{F,1,A,R,G,3000,832,"TEST"¦
B,1,2000,V,50,300,37,7,0,0,L,0¦
R,53,0,0,0,1,""¦}
{B,1,N,1¦
1,"Monarch Brand Printers"¦}
A-12 Samples
S a m p l e C o m p l i a n c e P a c k e t
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" p
L,V,500,115,90,85,3 p
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 p
L,V,500,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,400,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,298,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,200,2,0,390,5 p
C,568,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 p
C,568,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 p
C,529,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 p
C,511,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 p
C,472,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 p
C,387,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"(420) SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 p
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 p
C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 p
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 p
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 p
C,557,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 p
C,547,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 p
C,537,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 p
C,527,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 p
C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 p
T,1,15,V,529,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,2,15,V,511,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,130,8,L,0 p
T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,8,20,V,549,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,12,20,V,368,255,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1,"(420)ÿ" p
T,16,27,V,270,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
T,17,27,V,240,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,1,"WELCOMES GUEST # " p
T,18,27,V,210,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p }
Samples A-13
Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"1234567890" p
2,"0987654321" p
3,"~20142032678" p
4,"10028028662854" p
5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" p
6,"RODGER DIST CTR" p
7,"8292" p
8,"BROADWAY" p
9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p
10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" p
11,"" p
12,"08292 123456-123" p
13,"AR" p
14,"999-999999-99" p
15,"32678" p
16,"WYSIWYG" p
17,"99999" p
18,"TO A PRODUCT DEMO" p }
A-14 Samples
Samples A-15
S a m p l e F o r m a t P a c k e t
{F,5,A,R,G,576,768,"1HDREC1" p
L,S,19,39,499,39,38,"" p
L,S,19,93,499,93,15,"" p
L,S,19,124,499,124,15,"" p
L,S,19,155,499,155,38,"" p
C,461,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"PO NUMBER ",1 p
C,426,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”STORE " p
C,391,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”CTNS SHOPPED" p
C,357,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CTNS RECVD " p
C,320,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”CARRIER " p
C,259,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”FRT BILL # " p
C,196,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”FRT TERMS " p
C,159,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”KEYREC# " p
C,125,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”FRT CLAIM # " p
C,090,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”RECVD BY " p
C,056,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”DATE RECVD " p
C,461,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”:" p
C,426,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,391,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,357,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,320,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,259,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,196,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,159,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,125,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,090,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,056,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
T,01,08,V,461,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,02,08,V,426,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,03,08,V,391,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,04,08,V,357,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0
T,05,18,V,290,289,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0
T,06,12,V,230,395,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0
T,07,08,V,196,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0
T,08,08,V,159,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0
T,09,08,V,125,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0
T,10,08,V,090,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0
T,11,08,V,056,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0
T,12,11,V,259,762,0,1,2,2,B,B,0,1
R,1,"*_________*" p p p p p p p p p p
B,13,09,V,259,720,4,4,145,8,B,1
R,4,12,2,9,1,1 p p
R,50,3,8 p }
A-16 Samples
Sample Zero Batch Packet
{B,5,N,0 p }
{B,5,U,1 p
1,"6005710" p
2,"106" p
3,"3" p
4,"3" p
5,"ALLIED FREIGHT1234" p
6,"123456789012" p
7,"P" p
8,"10650337" p
9,"0" p
10,"VIC" p
11,"1/6/94" p
12,"106503378" p }
Samples A-17
S a m p l e D a t a E n t r y F o r m a t P a c k e t
This packet uses Option 5 (Data Entry Sources) and Option 20 (Data Entry
Prompts). After the printer receives the format packet, the operator can go into Batch Entry Mode at the printer and enter the batch data.
{F,1,A,R,E,300,200,"TEXTILES" p
T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,20,"PART NUMBER:" p
R,5,K p
B,2,12,V,150,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 p
R,20,"UPC NUMBER:" p
R,5,K p
D,3,20 p
R,20,"FIBER#1:" p
R,5,K p
D,4,3 p
R,20,"PERCENTAGE:" p
R,5,K p
T,5,30,V,80,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1," % " p
R,4,3,1,20,5,1 p
R,4,4,1,3,1,1 p
R,5,N p
D,6,20 p
R,20,”FIBER #2:" p
R,5,K p
D,7,3 p
R,20,"PERCENTAGE:" p
R,5,K p
T,8,30,V,65,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1," % " p
R,4,6,1,20,5,1 p
R,4,7,1,3,1,1 p
R,5,N p
C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,”MADE IN USA",0 p
L,S,110,30,110,150,10," " p
Q,240,30,270,150,3," " p }
Depending on the operator-entered batch data, a label similar to this one prints.
A-18 Samples
R F I D D a t a F i e l d S a m p l e s
The ellipsis indicate additional fields that are not shown.
RFID Data Field with a Copy Option
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" p
L,V,500,115,90,85,3 p
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 p
C,568,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 p
C,568,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 p
C,387,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"(420) SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 p
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 p
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 p
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 p
T,1,15,V,529,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,130,8,L,0 p
X,5,24,0 p
T,6,20,V,415,270,0,50,15,15,B,L,0,2 p
R,4,5,1,16,1,0 p
...}
Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"RFID TEST" p
3,"1005678" p
4,"67-90-32" p
5,"3123456789ABCDEF12345678" p
6,"ABCDEFG" p
...}
The RFID Data Field contains exactly 24 characters of data in ASCII Hex format for a 96-bit RFID tag.
Samples A-19
96-Bit RFID Data Field Samples
The following examples can be used for C1Gen1 and C1Gen2 (without locking).
The 96-bit data that can be displayed using the printer’s Setup, RFID menu for all these examples is the same: “313233343536373839303132.”
Refer to your RFID Multi-Protocol Application Notes for more information about displaying what is programmed into an RFID tag.
ASCII HEX Sample
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"ASCIIHEX" p
T,1,50,V,10,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
X,2,24,0 p }
{B,2,N,2 p
1,"313233343536373839303132" p
2,"313233343536373839303132" p }
ASCII Hex data type is selected in the RFID Data Field and the batch data is entered as ASCII Hex.
ASCII Sample
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"ASCII" p
T,1,50,V,10,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
X,2,12,1 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"123456789012" p
2,"123456789012" p }
ASCII data type is selected in the RFID Data Field and the batch data is entered as ASCII.
A-20 Samples
ASCII BINARY Sample
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"ASCIIBIN" p
T,1,96,V,10,10,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
X,2,96,2 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"00110001001100100011001100110100001101010011011000110111
0011100000110001001100100011001100110100" p
2,"00110001001100100011001100110100001101010011011000110111
0011100000110001001100100011001100110100" p }
Note: The ASCII Binary data needs to be entered on one line. Do not use line breaks to wrap the data. This data is shown on several lines because of the font size and margins.
ASCII Binary data type is selected in the RFID Data Field and the batch data is entered as ASCII Binary.
HEX Sample
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"HEX" p
T,1,50,V,10,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
X,2,12,3 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"~049~050~051~052~053~054~055~056~057~048~049~050" p
2,"~049~050~051~052~053~054~055~056~057~048~049~050" p }
Hex data type is selected in the RFID Data Field and the batch data is entered as Hex.
Note: Tilde numbers are decimal 0 to 255, which is how Hex values must be entered.
Samples A-21
SSCC96 Sample
{F,45,A,R,E,600,400,"SSCC96" p
C,45,220,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"_" p
C,75,385,0,50,40,30,B,L,0,2,"Monarch RFID" p
C,110,385,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SHIP TO RFID USER" p
C,110,150,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"CARRIER" p
C,150,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"PRO:" p
C,165,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"B/L:" p
C,200,380,0,50,18,15,B,L,0,2,"PAXAR AMERICAS, Inc." p
C,235,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"EMAIL: [email protected]" p
C,255,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"PHONE: 1 800 543-6650" p
C,275,345,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"VENDOR STK NO:" p
C,275,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"PACK/UNITS:" p
C,360,330,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"EPC Pure Identity:" p
C,275,190,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"COLOR:" p
C,315,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SIZE/STYLE:" p
C,415,390,0,50,12,12,B,L,0,2,"EPC#:" p
L,S,098,005,098,395,6,"" p
L,S,170,005,170,395,6,"" p
L,S,098,155,170,155,6,"" p
L,S,260,005,260,395,6,"" p
L,S,390,005,390,395,6,"" p
T,1,15,V,130,335,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 p
B,2,15,V,165,365,8,4,25,0,L,2 p
T,3,20,V,130,150,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 p
T,4,20,V,150,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 p
T,5,20,V,165,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 p
T,12,10,V,295,370,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
T,13,10,V,295,110,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
T,14,50,V,380,385,0,50,12,11,B,L,0,2 p
T,15,10,V,295,200,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
T,16,10,V,335,155,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
T,18,30,V,550,330,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
B,17,20,V,530,340,50,6,110,0,L,2 p
X,19,24 p
T,20,40,V,415,330,0,50,12,13,B,L,0,2 p
R,4,19,1,40,1,1 p }
A-22 Samples
Sample Batch Packet
{B,45,N,1 p
1,"VENDOR USA" p
2,"42060512" p
3,"PAXAR AMERICAS" p
4,"0987764356" p
5,"0020545640" p
12,"0075687332" p
13,"3600" p
14,"urn:epc:tag:sscc-96:1.0028028.0000001235" p
15,"RED" p
16,"48~"/TOUGH" p
17,"009280287586887" p
18,"0 09 28028 75688 7" p
19,"313401B5F0000004D3000000" p
20,"0" p }
Samples A-23
SGTIN 96 Sample
{F,46,A,R,E,600,400,"SGTIN96" p
C,45,220,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"_" p
C,75,385,0,50,40,30,B,L,0,2,"Monarch RFID" p
C,110,385,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SHIP TO RFID USER" p
C,110,150,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"CARRIER" p
C,150,150,0,50,9,9,B,L,0,2,"PRO:" p
C,165,150,0,50,9, 9,B,L,0,2,"B/L:" p
C,200,380,0,50,18,15,B,L,0,2,"PAXAR AMERICAS, Inc." p
C,235,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"EMAIL: [email protected]" p
C,255,380,0,50,14,12,B,L,0,2,"PHONE: 1 800 543-6650" p
C,275,345,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"VENDOR STK NO:" p
C,275,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"PACK/UNITS:" p
C,360,330,0,50,10,10,B,L,0,2,"EPC Pure Identity:" p
C,275,190,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"COLOR:" p
C,315,110,0,50,6,6,B,L,0,2,"SIZE/STYLE:"
p
C,415,390,0,50,12,12,B,L,0,2,"EPC#:" p
L,S,098,005,098,395,6,"" p
L,S,170,005,170,395,6,"" p
L,S,098,155,170,155,6,"" p
L,S,260,005,260,395,6,"" p
L,S,390,005,390,395,6,"" p
T,1,15,V,130,335,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 p
B,2,15,V,165,365,8,4,25,0,L,2 p
T,3,20,V,130,150,0,50,13,12,B,L,0,2 p
T,4,20,V,150,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 p
T,5,20,V,165,110,0,50,10,12,B,L,0,2 p
T,12,10,V,295,370,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
T,13,10,V,295,110,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p
T,14,50,V,380,385,0,50,12,11,B,L,0,2
T,15,10,V,295,200,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p p
T,16,10,V,335,155,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2 p p
T,18,30,V,550,330,0,50,15,18,B,L,0,2
B,17,20,V,530,340,50,6,110,0,L,2 p
X,19,24 p
T,20,40,V,415,330,0,50,12,13,B,L,0,2
R,4,19,1,40,1,1 p } p
A-24 Samples
Sample Batch Packet
{B,46,N,1 p
1,"VENDOR USA" p
2,"42060512" p
3,"PAXAR AMERICAS" p
4,"0987764356" p
5,"0020545640" p
12,"0075687332" p
13,"3600" p
14,"urn:epc:tag:sgtin-96:1.0028028.001234.2" p
15,"RED" p
16,"48~"/TOUGH" p
17,"009280287586887" p
18,"0 09 28028 75688 7" p
19,"303401B5F001348000000002" p
20,"0" p }
E x p a n d e d C 1 G e n 2 S a m p l e s
Password Lock
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"PWDLOCK" p
X,1,100,0 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"313233343536373831323334~028" p
C,"ABCDEFGH01234567UserMemorySample~028" p
C,"~028" p
C,"73737373~028" p
C,"CAD01234~028" p
C,"22022" p }
The EPC data is 313233343536373831323334, the user memory data is
ABCDEFGH01234567UserMemorySample, the access password is
73737373, and the kill password is CAD01234. Selects password lock (2) as the locking method for the EPC, user memory, access, and kill fields. To change the EPC, user memory, or kill fields, the access password must be sent with the batch data.
Samples A-25
Permalock and Password Lock
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"BOTHLOCK" p
X,1,100,0 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"313233343536373831323334~028" p
C,"~028" p
C,"~028" p
C,"73737373~028" p
C,"CAD01234~028" p
C,"30033" p }
The EPC data is 313233343536373831323334, the access password is
73737373, and the kill password is CAD01234. Selects permalock and password lock (3) as the locking method for the EPC, access, and kill fields, which means these fields are permanently un-writable. The EPC data can only be programmed ONE time.
A-26 Samples
F O N T S
Our printers support two types of fonts: Bitmapped (traditional printer fonts such as Standard and Reduced) and
Scalable/TrueType® (Font 50). This appendix gives a brief overview of each type of font and how your printer interprets fonts.
It also shows examples of the fonts loaded in your printer.
B
Number
3
4
1
2
5
6
10
56
70
71
72
73
11
15
16
17
18
50
Font Size and Appearance
Standard
Reduced
Bold
OCRA-like
HR1 - only for numeric data
HR2 - only for numeric data
CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold
(9 pt. at 203 dpi or 8 pt. at 300 dpi)
6 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Type face
7 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Type face
9 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Type face
11 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Type face
15 pt. CG Triumvirate™ Type face
EFF Swiss Bold
PaxarSymbols
15 pt. Paxar
18 pt. Paxar
15 pt. NAFTA
18 pt. NAFTA
Type of
Spacing monospaced monospaced monospaced monospaced monospaced monospaced proportional proportional proportional proportional proportional proportional scalable proportional proportional proportional proportional proportional
# of Dots Between
Characters
3 (203 dpi) 5 (300 dpi)
1 (203 dpi) 2 (300 dpi)
3 (203 dpi) 5 (300 dpi)
3 (203 dpi) 5 (300 dpi)
2 (203 dpi) 3 (300 dpi)
1 (203 dpi) 2 (300 dpi) varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/ each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter varies w/each letter
* The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support only ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets.
The scalable font does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). The Euro-dollar symbol at position
~192 is only available in the Standard, Reduced, and Bold fonts.
Fonts B-1
These samples were printed using the Internal Symbol set.
Standard Font Reduced Font Bold Font
OCRA-like Font
EFF Swiss Bold Font*
B-2 Fonts
* Printed with ANSI Symbol Set
These samples were printed using Code Page 437.
CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold
CG Triumvirate™ Typeface
Fonts B-3
P a x a r S y m b o l s F o n t 5 6 C h a r a c t e r s
A (decimal 65) =
40
(
48
0
56
8
64
:
72
H
80
P
P a x a r F o n t 7 0 a n d F o n t 7 1 C h a r a c t e r s
32 33
!
41
)
49
1
57
=
65
A
73
I
81
Q
34
_
42
*
50
2
58
>
66
B
74
J
82
R
35
#
43
+
51
3
59
?
67
C
75
K
83
S
36
$
76
L
84
T
60
@
68
D
44
,
52
4
37
%
77
M
85
U
61
;
69
E
45
-
53
5
38
&
46
.
54
6
62
<
70
F
78
N
86
V W
39
$
47
/
55
7
63
9
71
G
79
O
87
B-4 Fonts
8
64
@
72
H
80
P
88
X
96
$`
40
(
48
0
56
104 h
N A F TA F o n t 7 2 a n d F o n t 7 3 C h a r a c t e r s
32
I
81
Q
89
Y
97 a
105 i
9
65
A
73
33
!
41
)
49
1
57
J
82
R
90
Z
98 b
106 j
:
66
B
74
34
"
42
*
50
2
58
K
83
S
91
[
99 c
107 k
;
67
C
75
35
#
43
+
51
3
59
L
84
T
92
\
100 d
108 l
<
68
D
76
36
$
44
,
52
4
60
M
85
U
93
]
101 e
109 m
=
69
E
77
37
%
45
-
53
5
61
38
&
46
.
54
6
62
>
70
F
78
N
86
V
94
^
102 f
_
G
39
'
47
/
55
7
63
?
71
79
O
87
W
95
103 g
B i t m a p F o n t I n f o r m a t i o n
Our bitmap fonts are either monospaced (each character occupies the same amount of space) or proportional (each character is a different width). Use monospaced fonts for price fields and data you want to list in a column.
With proportionally spaced fonts, you may be able to place more characters on a line. However, you may need to experiment with these fonts and adjust field measurements in your format. The bitmapped fonts (either monospaced or proportional) appear jagged when magnified.
The magnification range is 1 to 7.
Use the MONARCH® MPCL™ Toolbox (Soft Font Utility), available on our
Web site, to convert a bitmap font to Hex or Run-Length encoding for the printer. Select the point size and characters to print. Bitmap fonts may image faster than a TrueType font, but you are limited to the point size and characters you downloaded.
Fonts B-5
M o n o s p a c e d F o n t M a g n i f i c a t i o n
Monospaced characters occupy the same amount of space within a magnification. Use monospaced fonts for price fields and data you want to list in a column. Decide how wide and tall you want the characters to appear on the labels. The following two tables show the width and height of each of the monospaced fonts after magnification.
This table includes the default (3 dots for Standard, 1 dot for Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) spacing.
U s i n g 2 0 3 D P I
1x
7x
Width Mag.
Units
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
Standard
Character
Width Sample
8.37
21.26
17
49.75
126.37
101
Reduced
Character
Width Sample
3.9
9.9
8
24.63
62.56
50
Character
Width Sample
13.3
33.78
27
84.24
214
171
Bold
U s i n g 3 0 0 D P I
1x
7x
Width Mag.
Units
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
Standard
Character
Width Sample
8.7
22
26
50.7
128.7
152
Reduced
Character
Width Sample
4
10.2
12
25
63.5
75
Character
Width Sample
13.7
34.7
41
85.7
217.6
257
Bold
Only the 1x width can be scanned with the OCRA-like font. Using a printhead with 203 dpi, the character widths are as follows: 7.9 (English),
20.1 (Metric), and 16 (Dots).
B-6 Fonts
To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (14 dots for Standard, 7 dots for Reduced, 24 dots for Bold) by the magnification and add the default spacing (3 dots for Standard, 1 dot for Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) between characters.
Example
14 (Standard font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 70 + 3 (default spacing between characters). There are 73 dots in the Standard font at 5x.
203 DPI Height Magnification
1x 7x
Standard
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
Reduced
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
10.8
27.4
22
6.9
17.5
14
75.9
192.8
154
48.28
122.6
98
Fonts B-7
Bold
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
OCRA-like (1x only)
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
300 DPI Height Magnification
16.7
42.4
34
11.8
30
24
1x
Standard
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
B-8 Fonts
Reduced
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
11
28
33
7
17.8
21
117.24
297.8
238
7x
77
195.6
231
49
124.5
147
Bold
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
OCRA-like (1x only)
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
12
30.5
36
18.7
47.4
56
130.7
332
392
Fonts B-9
P r o p o r t i o n a l F o n t M a g n i f i c a t i o n
Each character in a proportionally spaced font is a different height and width. You may be able to place more characters on a line using proportionally spaced fonts. You may want to experiment with these fonts and adjust field measurements in your format as needed. The bitmapped fonts (either monospaced or proportional) appear jagged when magnified.
The magnification range is 1 to 7. The following tables provide height and width magnification of sample characters.
C G T r i u m v i r a t e ™ T y p e f a c e B o l d ( 9 p t . ) 2 0 3 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
1.48
Minimum
6.4
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
3.76
3
10.3
26.2
21
16.26
13
44.8
114
91
10.8
27.4
22
75.9
192.8
154
Maximum
To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (3 dots for Minimum, 13 dots for Average, 22 dots for Maximum) by the magnification.
Example
13 (Average font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 65 dots in an average letter of the CG Triumvirate™ Typeface Bold at 5x.
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 2 0 3 D P I
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface Bold
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
B-10 Fonts
1x
8.87
22.5
18
7x
56
158
126
C G T r i u m v i r a t e ™
T y p e f a c e B o l d ( 9 p t . ) 3 0 0 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
1.5
Minimum
8
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
3.8
4.5
10.5
26.7
31.5
20.3
24
56
142.2
168
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n
11
28
331
77
195.6
231
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface Bold
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
9
22.9
27
7x
63
160.2
189
Fonts B-11
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 6 p t . ) 2 0 3 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
.99
Minimum
2.96
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2.51
2
6.9
17.5
14
7.52
6
20.7
52.6
42
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 2 0 3 D P I
5.9
15
12
41.4
105.2
84
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
5.9
14.99
12
7x
41.38
105.1
84
B-12 Fonts
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 6 p t . ) 3 0 0 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
1
Minimum
3
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2.54
3
7
17.8
21
7.62
9
21
53.3
63
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 3 0 0 D P I
6
15.2
18
42
106.7
126
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
6.7
16.9
20
7x
46.7
118.5
140
Fonts B-13
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 7 p t . ) 2 0 3 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
.99
Minimum
2.96
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2.51
2
6.9
17.5
14
7.52
6
20.7
52.6
42
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 2 0 3 D P I
5.9
15
12
41.4
105.2
84
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
8.87
22.5
18
7x
56
158
126
B-14 Fonts
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 7 p t . ) 3 0 0 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
1
Minimum
3
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2.54
3
9
22.9
27
7.62
9
21
53.3
63
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 3 0 0 D P I
7.3
18.6
22
51.3
130.4
154
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
9
22.9
27
7x
63
160.2
189
Fonts B-15
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 9 p t . ) 2 0 3 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
.99
Minimum
2.96
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2.51
2
6.9
17.5
14
7.52
6
20.7
52.6
42
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 2 0 3 D P I
5.9
15
12
41.4
105.2
84
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
8.87
22.5
18
7x
68
172.7
138
B-16 Fonts
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 9 p t . ) 3 0 0 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
1.3
Minimum
4.7
Average
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
3.4
4
9.3
23.7
28
11.8
14
32.7
83
98
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 3 0 0 D P I
9.6
24.5
29
67.7
171.8
203
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
10.7
27.1
32
7x
74.7
189.6
224
Fonts B-17
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 11 p t . ) 2 0 3 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
.99
Minimum
2.96
Average
5.9
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2.51
2
6.9
17.5
14
7.52
6
20.7
52.6
42
15
12
41.4
105.2
84
Maximum
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 2 0 3 D P I
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
8.87
22.5
18
7x
68
172.7
138
B-18 Fonts
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 11 p t . ) 3 0 0 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
1.7
Minimum
5.3
Average
10.7
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
4.2
5
11.7
29.6
35
13.5
16
37.3
94.8
112
27.1
32
74.7
189.6
224
Maximum
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 3 0 0 D P I
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
11.7
29.6
35
7x
81.7
207.4
245
Fonts B-19
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 1 5 p t . ) 2 0 3 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
.99
Minimum
2.96
Average
5.9
7x
1/10 mm 2.51
Dots
1/100 in.
2
6.9
1/10 mm 17.5
Dots 14
7.52
6
20.7
52.6
42
15
12
41.4
105.2
84
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 2 0 3 D P I
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
8.87
22.5
18
68
172.7
138
B-20 Fonts
C G Tr i u m v i r a t e ä Ty p e f a c e ( 1 5 p t . ) 3 0 0 D P I
1x
Width Mag.
1/100 in.
2
Minimum
7.6
Average
15.7
7x
1/10 mm
Dots
1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
5.1
6
14
35.5
42
19.4
23
53.7
136.3
161
39.8
47
47
119.4
141
H e i g h t M a g n i f i c a t i o n 3 0 0 D P I
Maximum
CG Triumvirateä
Typeface
1/100 in.
1/10 mm dots
1x
17.7
44.8
53
7x
8123.7
314.1
371
Fonts B-21
S c a l a b l e F o n t I n f o r m a t i o n
The scalable font is smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges because the font is created from an equation every time it is used. The field width varies with each letter.
When you define formats using scalable fonts, remember to set the character rotation to 0, because it is not supported. However, field rotation is supported for text or constant text fields using the scalable font. The
scalable font does not print a slashed zero.
Scalable fonts perform better in constant text fields, because those fields are imaged only once per batch, not once per label as in text fields. The transparent overlay allows closer field placement when using scalable fonts.
To use large point sizes (greater than 60), you must reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
The height and width magnification are defined in point size.
72 points = one inch. One inch = cell size. The cell size is the built-in space around the individual characters of the scalable font. The point size range is 4 to 255. If the height and width are not set to the same point size, the printed characters look tall and thin or short and thick, which allows for greater flexibility in the appearance of the font.
The 72 point EFF Swiss Bold sample shows the one inch cell size.
6pt Sample
10pt Sample
24pt Sample
48pt
Sample
7 2 p t
Sample
1"
B-22 Fonts
Tr u e Ty p e F o n t I n f o r m a t i o n
TrueType fonts follow the TrueType outline font standard. These fonts are smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges, because the font is created from an equation every time it is used. The height and width magnification are defined in point size. 72 points = one inch.
One inch = cell size. The cell size is the built-in space around the individual characters of the scalable font. The point size range is 4 to 255. The field width varies with each letter. The printer can accept downloaded TrueType fonts.
D o w n l o a d i n g Tr u e Ty p e F o n t s
The MONARCH® MPCL™ Toolbox (Font Utility) is available on our Web site and converts TrueType fonts to Hex or Run-Length encoding for the printer.
When downloading a TrueType font, you download the entire font, not particular characters or one point size. You can print a variety of symbol sets with International (Turkish, Latin, Spanish, etc.) characters. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all symbol sets may not be supported in a given font.
These font files are large and may image slower than bitmap fonts. The size of the font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory you must have available for fonts in the printer’s downloadable fonts buffer.
You may need to reallocate memory to use downloaded TrueType fonts.
After reallocating memory, resend the font, format, and batch packets. See
“Defining the Memory Configuration Packet” in Chapter 2 for more information. Also, Chapter 2 lists some special considerations when defining memory for downloaded TrueType fonts.
Fonts B-23
U s i n g I n t e r n a t i o n a l F o n t s
International fonts are available as bitmap or TrueType fonts. See "Bitmap
Font Information" or "TrueType Font Information" for more details. To use these fonts, you must purchase the memory expansion option and download the font to the printer.
Version 6.0 or greater (9855/9860) and version 3.0 or greater (9825) have a new font rasterizer, which allows for an additional symbol set
(110 – Unicode UTF-8). To use this symbol set, you must download an
International TrueType font. An International TrueType font containing
Chinese or Japanese characters requires the high memory option
(purchased separately). The high memory option is only available with the
9855/9860 printers. An International TrueType font containing Arabic characters may not require the high memory option.
Note: Because the 9825 printer’s memory is limited, only Latin fonts
(smaller than 256K) may fit in the printer’s flash memory. There is not enough memory to store an Asian font.
To use International fonts, consider the following information:
¨ All fonts contain an internal character mapping. The mapping is organized by one or more standards, such as BIG5. These mapping standards can provide over 65,000 characters, which are not represented in this manual.
The printer supports several mapping standards:
¨
¨
¨
¨
Unicode (UCS-2)
BIG5
GB2312
SJIS
¨ Specify a symbol set based on the characters to print and one that is compatible with the font's character mapping. For example, to print
Japanese characters, select symbol set 932 (Japanese Shift JIS) and a font compatible with that symbol set. See "Selecting a Symbol Set" for more information.
¨ To enter batch data, use the method specified by the font's character mapping and a compatible symbol set.
B-24 Fonts
S e l e c t i n g a S y m b o l S e t
Specify a symbol set based on the characters to print and one that is compatible with the font's character mapping. The symbol set parameter identifies the character mapping used in the text field or constant text field, for example, Unicode, BIG5, etc. If no symbol set is selected, the default symbol set (Internal Symbol Set) is used.
The printer automatically translates some character mappings to others.
For example, if you need a BIG5 font, it is possible to use Unicode text data. Use Unicode in the symbol set parameter to indicate the text mapping and select the BIG5 font needed in the font parameter (T8 or C5). The printer automatically translates the Unicode character values into BIG5 values before printing the character.
The following table lists the compatible mappings and symbol sets.
Font Character Mapping Symbol Set Parameter (T15, C13, or A6)
Unicode
Unicode
Unicode
Unicode
Unicode
BIG5
GB2312
SJIS
GB2312
BIG5
UTF-8
Batch Data* TrueType Font
Character Mapping
BIG5
SJIS
KSC5601
GB2312
Unicode
Unicode
Unicode
SJIS
GB2312
BIG5
Unicode
BIG5
SJIS
KSC5601
GB2312 use in text or constant text fields
102 - Unicode
If you are unsure which character mapping to select, use this symbol set, because the printer automatically translates the character mappings.
103 - BIG5
104 - GB2312
105 - SJIS (Code Page 932 - Japanese Shift-JIS)
106 - GB2312 (Code Page 936 - Simplified Chinese)
107 - BIG5 (Code Page 950 - Traditional Chinese)
110 - Unicode UTF-8
If you are unsure which character mapping to select, use this symbol set, because the printer automatically translates the character mappings.
Note: UTF-8 is very common. We recommend using it for compatibility with different host applications and data streams.
* Characters in batch data must be entered based on their mapping (Unicode, BIG5, etc.).
Note: Symbol sets 102-110 require the memory expansion option and a downloaded International TrueType font.
Fonts B-25
I n t e r n a t i o n a l F o n t S a m p l e
{F,3,A,R,E,150,200,"SIMPLE" p
T,1,5,V,10,10,0,100,30,30,B,L,0,0,102 p }
Symbol Set Parameter
{B,3,U,1 p
1,"~125~000~125~002~125~004~125~005" p }
Font Number
This example prints these four characters with Unicode batch data of
~125~000, ~125~002, ~125~004 and ~125~005.
A r a b i c F o n t S a m p l e
{F,3,A,R,E,220,400,"SIMPLE"¦
T,1,250,V,40,380,0,1000,24,24,B,E,0,0,110¦
T,2,250,V,90,380,0,1000,24,24,B,E,0,0,110¦}
{B,3,N,1¦
1,"%5 95% "¦
2,"5% polyester 95% cotton"¦}
This example prints on the 9855 printer with a downloaded Arabic font and the printer's Numeric Format set as Default.
Refer to the Internet for a listing of the characters in each code page.
Search on a particular code page, such as “codepage 936" to view the characters in that code page.
B-26 Fonts
L i c e n s i n g Yo u r F o n t s
We provide you with tools to create and download TrueType fonts.
However, it is your responsibility to purchase and license any fonts you download to your printer. Contact your font supplier for licensing information. Additional fonts that are compatible with the printer can be purchased from:
The Electronic Font Foundry
11 Silwood Road; Ascot; SL5 OPY; England
(0)1344 875 201 www.eff.co.uk
Korean, Chinese, and Japanese fonts can be purchased from:
Dynalab Inc.
2055 Gateway Place; Suite 400; San Jose, CA 95110
408-490-4224 www.dynalab.com
L o c a t i n g t h e F o n t N u m b e r i n a F o n t P a c k e t
If you are creating font packets, the font number is the second parameter in the packet. Software is available to create the font data and packet. Call
Technical Support for more information.
Font Number
Example
{W,200,A,M,68 p font data p font data p }
Use this number in T8 or in C5. See “Defining Text Fields” or “Defining Constant
Text Fields” in Chapter 2 for more information.
l
Example
Font Number
T,1,10,V,30,10,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
C,50,30,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 p
Font Number
Defines a text and constant text field using the downloaded (#200) font.
Fonts B-27
B-28 Fonts
S Y M B O L S E T S / C O D E P A G E S
This appendix contains a listing of the symbol sets, code pages, and extended character sets the printer supports.
Use the charts in this appendix to convert dot sequences from the image dot pattern to codes you can use in the fields. Use the
Binary to Hex Conversion Chart to convert Binary dot sequences to
Hexadecimal numbers for bitmap files. Use the Dot to Run Length
Encoding Chart to convert dot sequences to alphabetic characters for bitmap files.
C
S u p p o r t e d S y m b o l S e t s a n d C o d e P a g e s
The printers support these symbol sets and code pages: Internal,
ANSI, Bold, OCRA Character Set, DOS Code Page 437 and 850.
Additional Code Pages are supported with downloaded TrueType or Unicode (double-byte) fonts.
The printer defaults to the internal symbol set. See “Defining the
System Setup Packet” in Chapter 2 to change the symbol set.
S e l e c t i n g a S y m b o l S e t o r C o d e P a g e
The CG Triumvirate™ typefaces support only the ANSI and DOS
Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. These fonts print a slashed zero when using the ANSI symbol set.
Internal
ANSI
DOS Code
Pages 437 or 850
Use this symbol set to print international monetary symbols, the trademark (™ ) symbol, and for formats that may be used on other MPCLII printers.
Use this symbol set with proportionally spaced fonts.
Use this symbol set for extended and international characters with proportionally spaced fonts.
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-1
U s i n g C o d e 1 2 8 F u n c t i o n C o d e s
This table lists the characters for Bar Code 128 function codes. These functions are used with scanners.
Code
~201
~202
~203
~204
Function Code
F1
F2
F3
F4
E n t e r i n g E x t e n d e d C h a r a c t e r s
When using extended characters in your batch data file, type a tilde in front of the three-digit code. For example, if you want to include the character Ä in a text field using the Internal Symbol Set, type:
1,"~142" p
U s i n g I n t e r n a t i o n a l C h a r a c t e r S e t s / C o d e P a g e s
Symbol sets 100, 101, 852-860, and 1250-1258 may only be used with the scalable font (font#50) or downloaded TrueType fonts. TrueType fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all symbol sets may not be supported in a given font. For example, to print Hebrew characters, you need to find a font (such as Arial) that supports Hebrew characters; convert, and then download the font to your printer. Make sure the correct symbol set for Hebrew characters is selected.
Font 50 does not print the slashed zero or support Code Pages 101
(Wingdings) and 1256 (Arabic). The Euro-dollar symbol at position ~192 is only available in the Standard, Reduced, and Bold fonts.
Code pages 102-107, 932, 936, and 950 contain thousands of characters, which are not represented in this manual. These code pages require the memory expansion option and a downloaded International TrueType font.
The Code Pages (100 and greater) on the following pages were printed using Arial or a similar downloaded TrueType font. To determine the character code, add the column number and row number for the character.
For example, to produce the
ÿ
character with the ANSI character set, you would press Alt 255 (column 15 + row 240).
C-2 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
I n t e r n a l S y m b o l S e t
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-3
A N S I S y m b o l S e t
B o l d C h a r a c t e r S e t
C-4 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
O C R A C h a r a c t e r S e t
C o d e P a g e 1 0 0 ( M a c i n t o s h )
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-5
C o d e P a g e 1 0 1 ( W i n g d i n g s )
C o d e P a g e 4 3 7 ( L a t i n U . S . )
C-6 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
C o d e P a g e 8 5 0 ( L a t i n 1 )
C o d e P a g e 8 5 2 ( L a t i n 2 )
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-7
C o d e P a g e 8 5 5 ( R u s s i a n )
C o d e P a g e 8 5 7 ( I B M Tu r k i s h )
C-8 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
C o d e P a g e 8 6 0 ( M S - D O S P o r t u g u e s e )
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 0 ( L a t i n 2 )
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-9
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 1 ( C y r i l l i c )
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 2 ( L a t i n 1 )
C-10 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 3 ( G r e e k )
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 4 ( Tu r k i s h )
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-11
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 5 ( H e b r e w )
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 6 ( A r a b i c )
C-12 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 7 ( B a l t i c )
C o d e P a g e 1 2 5 8 ( V i e t n a m e s e )
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-13
A S C I I t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t
Use the chart below to translate the characters printed on your test label.
The chart lists ASCII characters and their hexadecimal and decimal equivalents.
Char.
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
Backspace
Tab linefeed home form feed carriage return
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
Hex
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
00
01
02
03
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
Decimal
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
0
1
2
3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Char.
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
Escape cursor right cursor left cursor up cursor down space
“
!
#
Hex
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
12
13
14
15
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
Decimal
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
C-14 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
,
Char.
(
‘
)
*
++
$
%
&
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
:
-
/
.
0
A S C I I t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )
Decimal
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
36
37
38
39
40
41
Hex
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
24
25
26
27
28
29
Char.
J
K
H
I
L
M
N
O
P
Q
C
D
A
B
E
F
G
;
<
=
>
?
@
Hex
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
Decimal
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
59
60
61
62
63
64
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-15
A S C I I t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )
Char.
a b
_
` c d e f g h
Z
[
X
Y
]
\
^^
R
S
T
U
V
W
Hex
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
52
53
54
55
56
57
Decimal
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
82
83
84
85
86
87
Char.
q r o p s t u k j i l m n
} p z
{
~ delete x y v w
Hex
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
Decimal
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
105
106
107
108
109
110
C-16 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
B i n a r y t o H e x C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t
Binary
00001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00011010
00011011
00011100
00011101
00011110
00011111
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
00001110
Hex
13
14
15
16
17
0F
10
11
12
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
03
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
Binary
00101111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
00110100
00110101
00110110
00110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
00111100
00111101
00111110
00111111
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
00100100
00100101
00100110
00100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
00101100
00101101
00101110
Hex
33
34
35
36
37
2F
30
31
32
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
23
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-17
B i n a r y t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )
Binary
01000000
01000001
01000010
01000011
01000100
01000101
01000110
01000111
01001000
01001001
01001010
01001011
01001100
01001101
01001110
01001111
01010000
01010001
01010010
01010011
01010100
01010101
01010110
01010111
01011000
01011001
01011010
01011011
01011100
01011101
01011110
01011111
Hex
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
46
47
48
49
40
41
42
43
44
45
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
53
54
55
4F
50
51
52
Binary
01100000
01100001
01100010
01100011
01100100
01100101
01100110
01100111
01101000
01101001
01101010
01101011
01101100
01101101
01101110
01101111
01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
01110110
01110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
01111110
01111111
Hex
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
66
67
68
69
60
61
62
63
64
65
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
73
74
75
6F
70
71
72
C-18 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
B i n a r y t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )
Binary
10000000
10000001
10000010
10000011
10000100
10000101
10000110
10000111
10001000
10001001
10001010
10001011
10001100
10001101
10001110
10001111
10010000
10010001
10010010
10010011
10010100
10010101
10010110
10010111
10011000
10011001
10011010
10011011
10011100
10011101
10011110
10011111
Hex
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
86
87
88
89
80
81
82
83
84
85
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
93
94
95
8F
90
91
92
Binary
10100000
10100001
10100010
10100011
10100100
10100101
10100110
10100111
10101000
10101001
10101010
10101011
10101100
10101101
10101110
10101111
10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111
Hex
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
A6
A7
A8
A9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
BD
BC
BF
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-19
B i n a r y t o H e x a d e c i m a l C o n v e r s i o n C h a r t ( c o n t i n u e d )
Binary
11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111
11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
11010110
11010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
11011110
11011111
Hex
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
C6
C7
C8
C9
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
DD
DE
DF
Binary
11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
11100110
11100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
11101100
11101101
11101110
11101111
11110000
11110001
11110010
11110011
11110100
11110101
11110110
11110111
11111000
11111001
11111010
11111011
11111100
11111101
11111110
11111111
Hex
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
E6
E7
E8
E9
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
FD
FE
FF
C-20 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
D o t t o R u n L e n g t h E n c o d i n g C h a r t
O N ( B l a c k ) D o t s
# of Dots
8
9
10
11
12
13
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
Code
L
M
J
K
H
I
C
D
A
B
E
F
G
# of Dots
21
22
23
24
25
26
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
O F F ( W h i t e D o t s )
# of Dots
8
9
10
11
12
13
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
Code k j h i l m c d a b f e g
# of Dots
21
22
23
24
25
26
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Code w x u v y z p q n o r s t
Code
Y
Z
U
V
W
X
P
Q
N
O
R
S
T
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-21
C-22 Symbol Sets/Code Pages
F O R M A T D E S I G N T O O L S
Use copies of these worksheets and grids to create formats, batch data, and check digit schemes. You may want to keep copies of the completed forms for your records:
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
Online Configuration Worksheet
Batch Worksheet
Check Digit Worksheet
Supply Layout Grids (English, Metric, Dots)
Format Worksheet
Sample Format Worksheet
D
Format Design Tools D-1
O n l i n e C o n f i g u r a t i o n W o r k s h e e t
D-2 Format Design Tools
B a t c h W o r k s h e e t
Format Design Tools D-3
C h e c k D i g i t W o r k s h e e t
D-4 Format Design Tools
8.0
SUPPLY LAYOUT (Inches)
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0 4.25
203
200
SUPPLY LAYOUT (Metric)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
110
100
90
80
70
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 108
1248
1152
1056
960
864
768
672
576
480
192
1536
1440
Supply Layout (dpi)
1344
384
288
192
96
0.0
192
203
0.0
96 192 288 384 480 576 672 768 806
0.0
102 203 305 406 508 609 711 812 853
0.0
406
305
203
102
812
711
609
508
1320
1218
1117
1015
914
203
1624
1523
1421
203
1624
Supply Layout (dpi)
1523
1421
1320
1218
1117
1015
914
812
711
609
508
406
305
203
102
1350
1200
0.0
0.0
203 0.0
102 203 305 406 508 609 711 812 853
300 0.0
150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 12001275
450
300
150
1050
900
750
600
1950
1800
1650
1500
300
2400
2250
2100
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
O P T I O N # 2
D a t a T y p e
R e s t r i c t i o n s
O P T I O N # 3
D a t a E n t r y
T e m p l a t e s
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
O P T I O N # 5
D a t a E n t r y
S o u r c e
O P T I O N # 6
U p l o a d F i e l d
D a t a
O P T I O N # 2 0
D a t a E n t r y
P r o m p t s
O P T I O N # 2 1
D e f i n e
E x t e n d e d
F i e l d N a m e s
O P T I O N # 3 0
P a d D a t a
# 4 2
P r i c e F i e l d
O P T I O N
# 6 1
R e i m a g e
F i e l d
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
O P T I O N # 5
D a t a E n t r y
S o u r c e
O P T I O N # 6
U p l o a d F i e l d
D a t a
O P T I O N # 2 1
D e f i n e
E x t e n d e d
F i e l d N a m e s
O P T I O N # 3 0
P a d D a t a
O P T I O N # 3 1
D e f i n e
C h e c k D i g i t
O P T I O N # 5 0
B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
O P T I O N # 5 1
P D F 4 1 7 S e c u r i t y /
T r u n c a t i o n
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
O P T I O N # 5 2
P D F 4 1 7
A s p e c t R a t i o
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
O P T I O N # 6 0
I n c r e m e n t i n g
D a t a
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
# 6 1
R e i m a g e
F i e l d
# 6 2
B y p a s s
B a r C o d e
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 1
3 1
3 1
3 1
5 0
5 0
5 0
5 0
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
5 1
5 1
5 1
5 1
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
5 2
5 2
5 2
5 2
6 0
6 0
6 0
6 0
O P T I O N # 5
D a t a E n t r y
S o u r c e
O P T I O N # 6
U p l o a d F i e l d
D a t a
O P T I O N # 3 0
P a d D a t a
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
O P T I O N # 6 0
I n c r e m e n t i n g
D a t a
6 2
6 2
6 2
6 2
F O R M A T W O R K S H E E T
F o r m a t N a m e
S u p p l y T y p e
F o r m a t #
C u s t o m e r N a m e
D a t e
S o f t w a r e V e r s i o n
S u p p l y S i z e
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
6 0
6 0
6 0
6 0
T C 9 8 0 0 F W R e v . A A 2 / 0 7
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
O P T I O N # 2
D a t a T y p e
R e s t r i c t i o n s
O P T I O N # 3
D a t a E n t r y
T e m p l a t e s
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
O P T I O N # 5
D a t a E n t r y
S o u r c e
O P T I O N # 6
U p l o a d F i e l d
D a t a
O P T I O N # 2 0
D a t a E n t r y
P r o m p t s
O P T I O N # 2 1
D e f i n e
E x t e n d e d
F i e l d N a m e s
O P T I O N # 3 0
P a d D a t a
# 4 2
P r i c e F i e l d
# 6 1
R e i m a g e
F i e l d
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
O P T I O N # 5
D a t a E n t r y
S o u r c e
O P T I O N # 6
U p l o a d F i e l d
D a t a
O P T I O N # 2 1
D e f i n e
E x t e n d e d
F i e l d N a m e s
O P T I O N # 3 0
P a d D a t a
O P T I O N # 3 1
D e f i n e
C h e c k D i g i t
O P T I O N # 5 0
B a r C o d e D e n s i t i e s
O P T I O N # 5 1
P D F 4 1 7 S e c u r i t y /
T r u n c a t i o n
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 0
O P T I O N # 5 2
P D F 4 1 7
A s p e c t R a t i o
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
O P T I O N # 6 0
I n c r e m e n t i n g
D a t a
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
# 6 1
R e i m a g e
F i e l d
# 6 2
B y p a s s
B a r C o d e
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 1
3 1
3 1
3 1
5 0
5 0
5 0
5 0
O P T I O N # 1
F i x e d C h a r a c t e r s
5 1
5 1
5 1
5 1
O P T I O N # 4
C o p y D a t a f r o m P r e v i o u s F i e l d
5 2
5 2
5 2
5 2
6 0
6 0
6 0
6 0
O P T I O N # 5
D a t a E n t r y
S o u r c e
O P T I O N # 6
U p l o a d F i e l d
D a t a
O P T I O N # 3 0
P a d D a t a
6 1
6 1
6 1
6 1
O P T I O N # 6 0
I n c r e m e n t i n g
D a t a
6 2
6 2
6 2
6 2
F O R M A T W O R K S H E E T
F o r m a t N a m e
( S A M P L E )
S u p p l y T y p e
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
F o r m a t #
C u s t o m e r N a m e
D a t e
S o f t w a r e V e r s i o n
S u p p l y S i z e
6 0
6 0
6 0
6 0
T C 9 8 0 0 F W R e v . A A 2 / 0 7
P R I N T E R D I F F E R E N C E S
Here are the major features and differences between each printer.
Earlier printer versions may not support all features.
P r i n t e r C o m p a r i s o n
Feature
Printhead Density DPI
(dots per inch)
Print speed IPS
(inches per second)
Maximum print area
203 DPI
9825 Printer
2.5, 4.0, or 6.0 IPS
4.0" x 16.0"
9855/9860 Printer
203 DPI
300 DPI (optional)
2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, or 12.0 IPS
(optional)
9860 max. is 8.0 IPS
4.0" x 16.0"
4.0" x 13.0" (w/300 dpi)
Recommended: all supplies - .05" on either edge and .02" at the end
Non-Print Zone Recommended: all supplies -
.05" on either edge and .02" at the end
Butt cut supplies - .15" at the beginning
Location of Print Area Center
Supply Width .75" x 4.25"
Supply Length
Power Up Mode
Feed Mode
.50" x 17.5"
Online
On demand/Continuous/
Peel Mode (optional)
Supplies
Supply Type
Keypad
Display
Serial Port Speed
Labels or Perforated Tags
Edge Aperture/Black mark/
Die cut/ Continuous
Feed/Cut
Enter/Pause
Escape/Clear buttons
2-line 16 characters per line
1200/2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400 Baud
Butt cut supplies - .15" at the beginning
Center
.75" x 4.25"
.32" x 17.5"
Online/Offline
On demand/Continuous/
Peel Mode (optional)
9860 does not support peel mode
Labels or Tags
Aperture/Black mark/Die cut/
Continuous
9860 does not support continuous supply
Feed/Cut
Enter/Pause
Escape/Clear buttons
9860 printer comes with an external keyboard
2-line 16 characters per line
1200/2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400/57600/
115200 Baud
E
Printer Differences E-1
Feature 9825 Printer 9855/9860 Printer
Field Number Range 0-999
Batch Separator Yes
0-999
Yes
High Energy Ribbon
Standard Fonts
No Yes
Standard/Reduced/Bold Standard/Reduced/Bold
OCRA/CG Triumvirateä Typeface OCRA/CG Triumvirateä Typeface
Bold 9 pt/CG Triumvirateä
Typeface 6, 7, 9, 11, or 15 pt
Bold 9 pt/CG Triumvirateä
Typeface 6, 7, 9, 11, or 15 pt
Scalable Font Standard Yes
(EFF Swiss Bold)
Yes
(EFF Swiss Bold)
Downloadable Fonts
Memory Allocation
RAM
Storage on
Power-down
Extended Memory
2D bar codes
Parallel Port
94x5 Emulation
Backfeed
Offline Batch Entry
Yes
Yes
4 Meg
2 Meg (Flash)
512K (Flash)
No
MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET/Data Matrix/Quick
Response
IEEE-1284 or Centronics Mode
No
Yes
No
Status Polling Yes
Immediate Commands Yes
Test Label Two labels for user and printer configuration
Ethernet Print Server Yes- supports IPX (NetWare),
TCP/IP, LAT, AppleTalk, and
NetBios/NetBEUI.
RF Print Server
External Knife
Yes
No
Stacker
Verifier
External Rewind
Tear Bar
No
No
Yes
Yes (optional)
Yes
Yes
16 Meg
4 Meg (Flash)
In Flash
Yes
MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET/Data Matrix/Quick
Response
IEEE-1284 or Centronics Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes, with keyboard
Yes
Yes
Two labels for user and printer configuration
Yes- supports IPX (NetWare),
TCP/IP, LAT, AppleTalk, and
NetBios/NetBEUI.
Yes
Optional on 9855
Standard on 9860
Yes
Yes
12 IPS
300 DPI
RFID support
No
No
No
Yes
Optional on 9855
NA on 9860
Optional on 9855
NA on 9860
Yes (optional)
Yes for 9855; No for 9860
E-2 Printer Differences
P o s t - P r i n t O p t i o n s
The following post-print options are available:
Printer 926ä
Knife
9855â
9860ä
(includes knife)
Yes
No
928ä
Stacker
932ä
Stacker
935ä
Rewind
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
938ä
Verifier
Yes
Yes
939ä
Keyboard
945ä
Unwinder
Yes Yes
Included with printer
Yes
Yes
No
Tear
Bar
Peel
Mode
Yes
No
It may be desirable to install the printer, knife, and stacker on sound-absorbing material in office, commercial, or industrial environments.
¨ The verifier cannot be used with the 926 Knife and/or 928 Stacker combination.
¨ The 9855 “knife ready” printer does not support on-demand/peel mode or the optional tear bar.
¨ The 926 knife must be installed before you can use the 928 stacker.
¨ To use the 938 verifier, the printer must be ordered “verifier ready” to receive the correct cut-out cover, which allows room for the verifier’s beam and for tearing supplies.
Printer Differences E-3
E-4 Printer Differences
G L O S S A R Y
Batch Data
2,"Monarch" p
Batch Control
E,0,1,4,2 p
Batch Header
{B,1,N,1}
Defines the actual information (as fields within { }) printed on the label.
Defines the print job (as a field).
Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
2,"Monarch" p }
Contains a batch header and the batch data. Enclosed within { }.
Bitmapped Fonts Reside in the printer’s memory. If you change the point size, you have changed the font. Magnifying these fonts causes some jaggedness to occur.
Buffer
First line of a batch, immediately following ({). Identifies the format and batch quantity.
Field
Storage area in the printer’s memory that holds specific data (images, formats, etc).
Can be text, bar codes, lines, boxes, constant, or non-printable text. It is the result of a field definition.
Field Definition Any string of parameters that pertain to one field. A field definition begins with a field identifier (such as T,
B, D, C, etc.).
T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0 p
Field Parameters Parameters that apply to a field and are separated by commas. (In the above example, B is a field element for black print on a white background.)
Flash Memory
Format
Contains information that is SAVED when the printer is turned off. Flash memory needs to be formatted before it can be used.
Layout or design for your printed label.
Format Header First line of a format, immediately following the start of packet ({). A format header must begin with F, followed by various header elements.
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"Fmt-1" p
Monospaced Fonts All characters have the same width and are easy to center justify. (Standard, bold, and reduced are monospaced.)
Non-volatile RAM Contains information that is SAVED when the printer is turned off.
Option
R,4,6,1,3,1 p
Any line within a format that applies special formatting to a field. This line always begins with R and must immediately follow the field it applies to.
Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
2,"Monarch" p }
Pre-image
Any string of characters within ({ }).
Proportionally
Spaced Fonts
Scalable Fonts
A way to optimize the printer, because it images the fields while data is collected. After the last field is imaged, the label prints almost immediately.
All characters have different widths and are difficult to center justify (CG Triumvirate™ Typefaces).
All characters are scalable and smooth at any point size. There are no jagged edges at any point size because the font is created from an equation every time it is used.
Soft (Downloaded)
Fonts
Reside in the printer’s RAM. They can be erased or overwritten.
TrueType Fonts
Volatile RAM
All characters follow the TrueType outline font standard.
All characters are scalable and smooth at any point size.
Contains information that is LOST when the printer is turned off.
I N D E X
A
alignment
allocating
Aztec bar code
optional settings using option 53
B backfeed
bar code
bar code density
bar codes
batch
downloading sample overview of packet
batch control
batch control field
batch data
sample with special chars using special chars in
batch data field
batch header
batch method of downloading
batch packet
batch quantity zero
Index 1
bitmap
bitmapped fonts
boxes
buffer
buffer selection buffer size selection
bypass bar code, using option 62
C
changing
character rotation
characters
number of in non-printable field 3-23
chart
check digit option
check digit schemes
check digits
checking
Index 2
communication
compatibility
compliance
compliance label
compliance label overlay
compliance label overlay sample
configuration
configuration packets
constant text fields
modifying character height modifying character width
control characters
selecting selecting new syntax
copy command
copy data
in partial form merging fields
creating
cut
D
data
data entry
prompts, defining as option 20
templates, defining as option 3
data error
data stream
data type restrictions
decrementing fields
fixing the first number syntax using option 60
Index 3
defining
memory configuration packet M 2-25
monetary formatting packet D 2-14
density
design tools
online configuration worksheet
designing a format
Index 4 diagnostics
list of hard printer failure errors 8-26
list of machine fault errors 8-19
direction of
constant text character constant text field
disabling
DOS batch files
downloadable fonts
downloading
order packets should be received 6-2
E
EM4122
enabling
ENQ
EPC data
error
errors
F
field
field definition
field elements
field options
incrementing/decrementing fields 4-22
security/truncation for PDF417
field, options
fields
using data entry/copied fields
fixed data
4-5 - 4-6, 4-10 - 4-11, 4-13 -
flash
font
font packets
font upload packet
fonts
Index 5
format
format header
formats
formatting errors
G generating check digits
graphic
graphic packets
grid
guidelines
H hard printer failure errors
hex graphic packet
human readable characters
I
imaging
imaging time
IMD
immediate commands
incrementing fields
information
inquiry request
inquiry response
Index 6
J job request
job response
job status
justification
K
knife
L
lock
M machine errors
magnification
mapping
method, hexadecimal method, run length
Maxicode
measurement
on a grid using multiple printer types
memory
storing images in flash storing images in RAM
memory buffer
merging
modulus
description of check digit calc
Index 7
monetary
decimal selection formatting syntax list of options symbol selection symbol setting
monospaced fonts
multiple part
network
non-printable fields
N
O
online configuration worksheet
opaque overlay
optimizing
compatibility for multiple printers 1-8
option
options
options,field
incrementing/decrementing fields 4-22
4-18
security/truncation for PDF417
P packet
packet A
packet B
packet C
packet control characters
packet D
packet E
packet F
packet G
packet M
Index 8
packets
parameters
password
password lock
PDF417 bar codes
permalock
permalock and password lock
placing
polling for status
positioning
pre-image
price fields
restrictions with check digits
restrictions with incrementing
print control
printer
printer configuration
printer status
printers
printhead
Index 9
printing
problem
problems
framing error while downloading
image time and changing data 9-4
image time and unchanging data 9-3
imaging time and repeating field parameters 9-4
list of hard printer failure errors 8-26
list of machine fault errors 8-19
missing/overlapping due to magnification
procedures
1-4 daily checklist print logs
program AFI field RFID (UHF)
proportionally spaced fonts
protocol
R
RAM
requesting job status
requesting printer status
resetting packet control characters 2-17
response
RFID (HF) setup
RFID (UHF) setup
RFID data field
RFID errors
RFID field
RFID tag
rotating
constant text characters constant text fields
RS232 trailer characters
run length graphic packet
Index 10
S sample
calculate check digit option 4-15
check digit scheme packet 4-27 - 4-28
printer configuration uploaded
proportional font magnification
run length graphic packet 5-20
sequential method downloading 6-14
schemes
script errors
security/truncation
segments
selector, check digit
sequential downloading
setting
monetary symbol number of decimal places
print contrast print position print speed printhead width
Index 11
size of
soft fonts
special characters
status polling
storing
images images in flash images in RAM
supply
about the layout grid measurement on a grid
supply setup
supply type/position selection
symbols
syntax
memory configuration packet M 2-25
packet control characters packet E2-15
printer configuration upload 2-6 - 2-7
system setup
T table
special chars, sample batch data 6-12
test label
text fields
Index 12
modifying character height 3-5
modifying character spacing 3-4, 3-24
thickness
trailing spaces
transparent overlay
types of data
types of fields
U unit of measure
upload
uploading
V variable length
vectors
verifer
verifier
verifier configuration
verifier field
volatile RAM
W width/length
worksheet
Index 13
Index 14
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project